km-1510, km-1810 parts, service manual

SERVICEMANUAL

Published in July ’012A170762Revision 2

KM-1510/1810

CAUTION

DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITHTHE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OFUSED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

ATTENTION

IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE REC-OMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉESCONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety oftheir customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnelare advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautionsdescribed here before engaging in maintenance activities.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger andto prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect

compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliancewith warning messages using this symbol.

CAUTION:Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrectcompliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols

The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific pointof attention is shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

1. Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections toone outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always checkthat it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire orelectric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may causeexplosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by theproper authorities. .............................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............

• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as coolas possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this maycause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer isaccidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attentionimmediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtainmedical attention. ..............................................................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’sinstruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................

• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. Ifit is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light maydamage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may causeelectric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................

CAUTION

• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they aresafely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................

• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can causeabnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................

• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................

2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other relatedbrochures. .........................................................................................................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safetymechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other relatedbrochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or otherserious accident. ...............................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of apart, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............

• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removingthem; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................

• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with acable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. .......

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................

• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that wereremoved, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgottenconnector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................

• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to theinstruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main

switch on.· Always wash hands afterwards.

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly tofire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................

• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outletimmediately. ......................................................................................................................................

3. Miscellaneous

WARNING

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other thanthe specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................

1-1-1

2A1/2

CONTENTS

1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1-3

(1) Copier ............................................................................................................................................. 1-1-3(2) Operation panel .............................................................................................................................. 1-1-4

1-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-51-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-6

(1) Drive system 1 (drive motor drive train) .......................................................................................... 1-1-6(2) Drive system 2 (scanner motor drive train) ..................................................................................... 1-1-7(3) Drive system 3 (original feed motor (18 cpm copier only) drive train) ............................................ 1-1-8(4) Drive system 4 (ST feed motor (optional) drive train) ..................................................................... 1-1-8

1-2 Handling Precautions1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-11-2-2 Developer and toner ............................................................................................................................. 1-2-11-2-3 Installation environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-2-2

1-3 Installation1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................................................................... 1-3-1

(1) Installation procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-11-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .................................................................................................................. 1-3-111-3-3 Copier management ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-12

(1) Executing a copier management item .......................................................................................... 1-3-12(2) Default settings ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-13

1-3-4 Installing the optional drawer ............................................................................................................. 1-3-161-3-5 Installing the printer board/network board (option) ............................................................................. 1-3-181-3-6 Installing the memory board (standard for 18 cpm/optional for 15 cpm) ............................................ 1-3-21

1-4 Maintenance Mode1-4-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-1

(1) Executing a maintenance item ....................................................................................................... 1-4-1(2) Maintenance mode item list ............................................................................................................ 1-4-2(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ............................................................................................ 1-4-5

1-5 Troubleshooting1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1

(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-5-2(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-6

1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-10(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................ 1-5-10(2) Self-diagnostic codes ................................................................................................................... 1-5-10

1-5-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................................. 1-5-15(1) No image appears (entirely white). ............................................................................................... 1-5-16(2) No image appears (entirely black). ............................................................................................... 1-5-16(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-17(4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-17(5) A white line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-17(6) A black line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-18(7) A black line appears laterally. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-18(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ................................................................... 1-5-18(9) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................................. 1-5-19

(10) Image is blurred. ........................................................................................................................... 1-5-19(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-19(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-20

1-1-2

2A1/2

(13) Paper creases. ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-20(14) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-20(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................ 1-5-21(16) Fixing is poor. ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-21(17) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-21(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................................... 1-5-22(19) Image contrast is low (carrier scattering). ..................................................................................... 1-5-22

1-5-4 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-23(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is turned on. ............................................. 1-5-23(2) The drive motor does not operate. ............................................................................................... 1-5-23(3) The scanner motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-23(4) The toner feed motor does not operate. ....................................................................................... 1-5-23(5) Cooling fan motor does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-5-23(6) Original paper feed motor does not operate. ................................................................................ 1-5-24(7) ST feed motor does not operate. .................................................................................................. 1-5-24(8) The registration clutch does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-5-24(9) The paper feed clutch does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-5-24

(10) The ST paper feed clutch does not operate. ................................................................................ 1-5-24(11) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. ......................................................................... 1-5-24(12) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................ 1-5-24(13) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ........................................................................................... 1-5-24(14) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ........................................................................................... 1-5-24(15) The fixing heater does not turn on (C610). ................................................................................... 1-5-24(16) The fixing heater does not turn off. ............................................................................................... 1-5-25(17) Main charging is not performed (C510). ....................................................................................... 1-5-25(18) Transfer charging is not performed. ............................................................................................. 1-5-25(19) No developing bias is output. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-25(20) The copier scans the contact glass when originals are loaded on the DF. .................................. 1-5-25(21) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated

when the main switch is turned on. .............................................................................................. 1-5-25(22) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover,

paper conveying cover and optional drawer left cover are closed. ............................................... 1-5-26(23) Others. .......................................................................................................................................... 1-5-26

1-5-5 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-27(1) No primary paper feed. ................................................................................................................. 1-5-27(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................ 1-5-27(3) Skewed paper feed. ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-27(4) The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-27(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ................................................................................. 1-5-27(6) Paper jams. .................................................................................................................................. 1-5-27(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ................................................................................... 1-5-27(8) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-5-27

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1

(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1(2) Running a maintenance item .......................................................................................................... 1-6-2

1-6-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-6-3(1) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulleys ............................................................................... 1-6-3(2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys and

ST paper conveying roller (option) ................................................................................................. 1-6-5(2-1) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys ................................................................. 1-6-5(2-2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper conveying roller ........................................................... 1-6-8

(3) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley ..................................................................... 1-6-9(4) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................ 1-6-12

(4-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing .................................................... 1-6-12(4-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing ..................................... 1-6-13(4-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ........................................................................... 1-6-14(4-4) Adjusting the margins for printing ........................................................................................ 1-6-15(4-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper .......................................................................... 1-6-16

1-1-3

2A1/2

1-6-3 Optical section .................................................................................................................................... 1-6-17(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ................................................................................... 1-6-17(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .................................................................................... 1-6-19

(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ............................................................................................... 1-6-19(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires ...................................................................................................... 1-6-20

(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .............................................................................. 1-6-23(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) .................................................................................. 1-6-25(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ....................................................................... 1-6-26(6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ........................................ 1-6-27(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction ................................... 1-6-28(8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ........................................................................... 1-6-29(9) Adjusting the scanner center line ................................................................................................. 1-6-30

(10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................ 1-6-311-6-4 Image formation section ..................................................................................................................... 1-6-32

(1) Detaching and refitting the image formation unit .......................................................................... 1-6-32(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit ............................................................................... 1-6-33(3) Detaching and refitting the drum .................................................................................................. 1-6-34(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade ................................................................................... 1-6-36(5) Replace the developer .................................................................................................................. 1-6-37

1-6-5 Transfer section ................................................................................................................................. 1-6-38(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly ..................................................................... 1-6-38

1-6-6 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-39(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ........................................................................................... 1-6-39(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor .......................................................................... 1-6-39(3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater ....................................................................................... 1-6-40(4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws ............................................................... 1-6-42(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ........................................................................................... 1-6-43(6) Detaching and refitting the press roller ......................................................................................... 1-6-43

1-6-7 DF section .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6-45(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwardong pulley and

DF feed pulley (18 cpm copier only) ............................................................................................. 1-6-45(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley (18 cpm copier only) ........................................ 1-6-47(3) Adjusting the DF lateral squareness ............................................................................................. 1-6-48(4) Adjusting the DF magnification ..................................................................................................... 1-6-49(5) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration ................................................................................... 1-6-50(6) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration .................................................................................... 1-6-51(7) Adjusting the DF center line ......................................................................................................... 1-6-52(8) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF ........................................................ 1-6-53

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement1-7-1 Replacing the main PCB ...................................................................................................................... 1-7-11-7-2 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................ 1-7-31-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ............................................................................................... 1-7-4

2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 2-1-12-1-2 Main charging section .......................................................................................................................... 2-1-42-1-3 Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-6

(1) Original scanning ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-7(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-9

2-1-4 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 2-1-11(1) Formation of magnetic brush ........................................................................................................ 2-1-12(2) Toner density detection by the toner sensor ................................................................................ 2-1-13(3) Toner density control .................................................................................................................... 2-1-13(4) Correcting the toner sensor control voltage .................................................................................. 2-1-14(5) Correcting toner output voltage .................................................................................................... 2-1-15

2-1-5 Transfer and separation section ......................................................................................................... 2-1-162-1-6 Cleaning section ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-182-1-7 Charge erasing section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-19

1-1-4

2A1/2

2-1-8 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-202-1-9 DF section .......................................................................................................................................... 2-1-22

(1) SDF (15 cpm copier) .................................................................................................................... 2-1-22(2) ADF (18 cpm copier) .................................................................................................................... 2-1-23

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ........................................................................................................................... 2-2-1

(1) PCBs .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-1(2) Switches and sensors ..................................................................................................................... 2-2-2(3) Motors ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-3(4) Other electrical components ........................................................................................................... 2-2-4

2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-12-3-2 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-42-3-3 Operation PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3-92-3-4 CCD PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3-112-3-5 Laser diode PCB ................................................................................................................................ 2-3-12

2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2Timing chart No. 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3Timing chart No. 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4Timing chart No. 5 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-5Chart of image adjustment procedures .......................................................................................................... 2-4-6Wiring diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 2-4-9

2A1/2

1-1-1

1-1-1 Specifications

Type ............................................... DesktopCopying system.............................. Indirect electrostatic systemOriginals ......................................... DF (18 cpm copier): Sheets of paper (Maximum original size: folio/81/2" × 14")

DF (15 cpm copier): Sheets of paper (A4R, folio/81/2" × 11"R, 81/2" × 14")Platen: Sheets of paper, books, 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: folio/81/2" × 14")

Original feed system ...................... Contact glass: fixedDF: sheet-through

Copy paper .................................... Drawer: Plain paper (64 - 80 g/m2)Bypass table: Plain paper (60 - 160 g/m2)Special paper: Transparencies, letterhead, colored paperand envelopes (when using the printer function only)Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.

Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: folio/81/2" × 14"Minimum: A6R /51/2" × 81/2"R (When the bypass table is used)

Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 50 - 200%, 1% incrementsCopy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode (15 cpm copier):

A4R/81/2" × 11"R: 15 copies/min.At 100% magnification in copy mode (18 cpm copier):A4R/81/2" × 11"R: 18 copies/min.

First copy time ................................ Within 6.3 s (A4R/81/2" × 11"R, original placed on the platen)Warm-up time ................................. Within 30 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F, humidity 65% RH)

In preheat/energy saver mode: Within 30 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F,humidity 65% RH) [priorty to power save]

In preheat/energy saver mode: Within 10 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F,humidity 65% RH) [priorty to recovery]

Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feedCapacity:Drawers: 250 sheetsManual feedCapacity:Bypass: 50 sheets

Continuous copying ....................... 1 - 99 sheetsPhotoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 30 mm)Charging system ............................ Single positive corona chargingExposure light source .................... Semiconductor laserDeveloping system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (magnetic brush)

Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and N29T black tonerToner density control: toner sensorToner replenishing: automatic from a toner container

Transfer system ............................. Transfer rollerFixing system ................................. Heat roller

Heat source: halogen heaters (900 W for 120 V specifications/1030 W for220 - 240 V specifications)

Control temperature: 180°C/356°F (at normal ambient temperature)Abnormally high temperature protection device: 150°C/302°F thermostatFixing pressure: 36.28 N

Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lampCleaning system ............................ Cleaning bladeScanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensorResolution ...................................... 600 × 600 dpiLight source ................................... Inert gas lampDimensions .................................... 15 cpm copier:

497 (W) × 497 (D) × 376 (H) mm199/16" (W) × 199/16" (D) × 1413/16" (H)18 cpm copier:497 (W) × 497 (D) × 445 (H) mm199/16" (W) × 199/16" (D) × 171/2" (H)

Weight ............................................ 15 cpm copier: Approx. 25 kg/55 lbs18 cpm copier: Approx. 27 kg/59.4 lbs

2A1/2

1-1-2

Floor requirements ......................... 691 (W) × 497 (D) mm273/16" (W) × 199/16" (D)

Functions........................................ Self-diagnostics, preheat, automatic copy density control, enlargement/reductioncopy and photo mode

Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 9 A220 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 4.8 A (average 2.5 A)

Power consumption ....................... 1080 W (120V)1152 W (220 - 240V)(Measured value: 982 W (120V)/1131 W (220 - 240V)

Options ........................................... Drawer, memory board (standard for 18 cpm copier), printer board, printer networkboard

2A1/2

1-1-3

1 DF2 Original table3 Original insertion guides4 DF open/close handle5 Original eject cover6 DF original switchback cover7 Operation panel8 Paper conveying cover handle9 Paper conveying cover0 Multi-Bypass! Insert guides@ Support guide# Toner container$ Waste toner tank

% Cleaning shaft^ Front cover& Main switch* Copy storage section( Drawer) Platen⁄ Original size scales¤ Length guide‹ Width guide› Width adjustment leverfi Length guide storage sectionfl Drawer bottom plate‡ Hnadles for transport— Original holder (15 cpm copier only)

Figure 1-1-1

1-1-2 Parts names

(1) Copier

12°

9

8

@ 0

!

(

4

7

¤

fi

fl ›‹

123

9

8

@ 0

!

6

fl

5

›‹ (

4

7

¤

fi

⁄

% $ # ‡

&

^

*

)

• 15 cpm Copier • 18 cpm Copier

2A1/2

1-1-4

(2) Operation panel

Metric

Inch

1 Start key (Indicator)2 Stop/Reset key3 Size Select keys4 Data/On-line Indicator5 Printer key6 Number of Copies/Zoom (+) key7 Number of Copies/Zoom (–) key8 Zoom Input/Enter key9 Copy quantity/magnification display0 Add Toner indicator! Memory Overflow/Data Error indicator

@ Paper Select key# Drawer indicator$ Optional drawer indicator% Multi-bypass indicator^ DF indicator& Misfeed indicator* Image mode selection key( 2 in 1/4 in 1 key) Sort key (indicator)⁄ Copy exposure adjustment keys

1236 587@%& #$⁄

49* ^() 0!

1236 587@%& #$⁄

49* ^() 0!

Figure 1-1-2

2A1/2

1-1-5

1-1-3 Machine cross section

1 Paper feed section2 Main charging section3 Optical section4 Developing section5 Transfer and sparation section6 Cleaning section7 Charge erasing section8 Fixing section9 ADF (18 cpm copier)0 SDF (15 cpm copier)

Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section

Light path

Original path

Paper path

1

8

5

6 7 2

4

3

9

0

2A1/2

1-1-6

1 Drive motor gear2 Gear 67/303 Gear 23/164 Gear 37/215 Gear 236 Bypass paper feed clutch gear7 Registration clutch gear8 Gear 32/189 Paper feed clutch gear

0 Gear 97/25! Drum drive gear 53@ Gear 40/45# Gear 41$ Gear 28/20% Gear 26/20^ Fixing idle gear 44& Gear 25* Heat roller gear

Figure 1-1-4

1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Drive system 1 (drive motor drive train)

1

3

0

@

*

^&

$

%

#

!

4

6

5

2

78

9

As viewed from machine rear

2A1/2

1-1-7

(2) Drive system 2 (scanner motor drive train)

Figure 1-1-5

1 Scanner motor gear2 Scanner drive gear 27/133 Scanner belt4 Gear Z235 Idle gear 216 Gear Z307 Idle gear 21*8 Drive change gear 13*

9 Drive change gear 25*0 Gear 25/19*! Conveying gear 20*@ Conveying pulley 22*# Conveying pulley 22*$ Drive pulley*% Conveying belt*

*: For the 15 cpm copier only.


@, #, $ and % are parts of machine front

1

9

8

7

23

6

54

$

#%!@

0

2A1/2

1-1-8

(3) Drive system 3 (original feed motor (18 cpm copier only) drive train)

Figure 1-1-6

1 Original feed motor gear2 Feed gear 42/203 Feed drive gear 204 Feed pulley 205 Idle gear 206 Feed drive gear 207 Lift gear 38


7

1

2

4

3

5

6

(4) Drive system 4 (ST feed motor (optional) drive train)

Figure 1-1-7

1 ST feed motor gear2 Gear 25/593 Gear 194 Gear 195 ST paper feed clutch gear 20


5 1

234

2A1/2

1-2-1

1-2-1 DrumNote the following when handling or storing the drum.• When removing the image formation unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.• Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 10°C/50°F and 32.5°C/90.5°F and at a relative humidity not higher

than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.• Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

1-2-2 Developer and tonerStore the developer and toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.

2A1/2

1-2-2

1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 32.5°C/50 - 90.5°F 2. Humidity: 20 - 85%RH 3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 9 A

220 - 240 V AC, 4.8 A (average 2.5 A) 4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ±0.3%/60 Hz ±0.3% 5. Installation location

• Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or otherstrong light when removing paper jams.

• Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed ontothe machine.

• Avoid dust and vibration.• Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.• Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1° ).• Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as

mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.• Select a room with good ventilation.

6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 300 mm/1113/16"Machine right: 300 mm/1113/16" Machine left: 500 mm/1911/16"

Figure 1-2-1a Installation dimensions

a: 376 mm/1413/16"b: 462 mm/183/16"c: 497 mm/199/16"d: 722 mm/287/16"e: 497 mm/199/16"f: 847 mm/335/16"g: 845 mm/331/4"

a b

c

d

e

g

f

• 15 cpm copier

Figure 1-2-1b Installation dimensions

a: 445 mm/171/2"b: 526 mm/2011/16"c: 497 mm/199/16"d: 605 mm/2313/16"e: 497 mm/199/16"f: 847 mm/335/16"g: 871 mm/345/16"

• 18 cpm copier

a b

c

d

e

g

f

1-3-1

2A1/2

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure

Unpack.

Remove the tapes.

Adjust the fixing pressure.

Remove the pad inside the machine.

Attach the original holder (15 cpm copier).

Install a waste toner tank.

Connect the power cord.

Load paper.

Make test copies.

Start

Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.

Install a toner container.

Remove the tapes, pads and sheet inside the drawer.

Completion of the machine installation.

Caution:Be sure to install a waste toner tank when setting the machine.

1-3-2

2A1/2

1

^

3

2

⁄

&*(

@

)

4

8

6

5

7

9

0

0

!#

$

%

Figure 1-3-1 Unpacking

Unpack.

1Copier2Power cord3Upper pads4Stay5Outer case6Bottom pads7Tray spacer8Machine cover9Scanner pin tag0Fixing lever tags!Waste toner tank spacer

@Original holder#Bar code labels$Drawer spacer%Front drawer spacer^Sheet& Instruction handbook* Installation manual(Business reply mail (120 V specs only))Plastic bag

• 15 cpm copier

1-3-3

2A1/2

1

^

3

2

@

&*(

)

4

8

6

5

7

9

0

0

!#

$

%

Figure 1-3-2 Unpacking

1Copier2Power cord3Upper pads4Stay5Outer case6Bottom pads7Tray spacer8Machine cover9Scanner pin tag0Fixing lever tags

!Plastic bag@Pad#Bar code labels$Drawer spacer%Front drawer spacer^Sheet& Instruction handbook* Installation manual(Business reply mail (120 V specs only)

• 18 cpm copier

1-3-4

2A1/2

1. Remove the tapes.15 cpm: 12 pieces/18 cpm: 8 pieces

2. Open the bypass tray and paper conveying coverand then remove the two tapes.

Remove the tapes.

Figure 1-3-3

Figure 1-3-4

• 18 cpm copier

• 15 cpm copier

Tapes

1-3-5

2A1/2

Figure 1-3-5

3. Lift the fixing section release levers and close thepaper conveying cover.

4. Pull the drawer out and remove the tapes andtwo pads.Caution: Be sure to load paper after the main

switch is turned on and copying isenabled. Loading paper before turningthe main switch on may cause paperjams.

5. Open the DF cover and remove the sheet on thecontact glass.

Fixing sectionrelease levers

Tapes

Pads

Figure 1-3-6

Figure 1-3-7

Sheet

Remove the tapes, pads and sheet insidethe drawer.

Adjust the fixing pressure.

1-3-6

2A1/2

6. Remove the tapes and two pins for light sourceunit 1 and 2.

7. Open the front cover and store the removed pinsby securing them on the inside of the cover. Thestoring locations of the pins are marked inside thefront cover.Caution: Be sure to refit the pins whenever the

copier is moved.

8. Remove the pad.

Figure 1-3-8

TapesPins

Figure 1-3-9

Pins

Figure 1-3-10

Pad

Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.

Remove the pad inside the machine.

1-3-7

2A1/2

9. Pull out the tape from the developing sectiongently.

10. Hold the toner container vertically and tap the top15 times. Turn the container upside-down and tapthe top 15 times. Then, hold the containerhorizontally and shake it from side to side 10times.

11. Insert the toner container into the copier as far asit will go and then slide it to the right as indicatedby the marked arrows.

Tape

Figure 1-3-11

Figure 1-3-12

Install a toner container.

Figure 1-3-13

Toner container

1-3-8

2A1/2

Waste toner tank

Figure 1-3-14

12. Install the waste toner tank and close all thecovers and drawers.

13. Install the original holder to the left side of thecopier.

14. Connect the power cord and turn the main switchon.Caution: Never turn the power off or open covers

while the copier is driving. Doing so maycause printing problems or contaminatethe copier internally.

Original holder

Figure 1-3-15

Install a waste toner tank.

Attach the original holder (15 cpm copier only).

Connect the power cord.

Figure 1-3-16

Power cord

1-3-9

2A1/2

15. Pull the drawer out as far as it will go.When the optional drawer is installed, do not pullmore than one drawer out at a time.

16. Press the drawer bottom plate down and lock itthere.

17. Holding the width adjustment lever, move it toalign the width guide with the required paperwidth.

18. While squeezing the presses on the sides,remove the length guide and then insert it into theholes of the required paper length.Store the length guide in the space shown in thediagram when the paper touches the right-handwall of the drawer.

Figure 1-3-17

Drawer bottom plate

Figure 1-3-18

Width adjustmentlever

Width guide

Figure 1-3-19

Load paper.

Length guide

1-3-10

2A1/2

19. Set the paper flush against the left-hand wall ofthe drawer.* Load paper so that it is kept under the claw of

the drawer.* When loading paper into the drawer, make sure

that the copy side is facing upward (the copyside is the side facing upward when thepackage is opened.)

* Check that the length and width guides securelycontact the paper. If there is a gap, adjust theposition of the length or width guide to close it.

* Load paper all at once and do not add paperuntil all sheets are used up. Adding paper to adrawer that still contains paper may causepaper jams.

20. Push the drawer back in gently.* Check that the paper is kept under the claw of

the drawer. If not, reload the paper.

21. Set the original and make test copies.

Figure 1-3-20

Claw

Make test copies.

Completion of machine installation.

1-3-11

2A1/2

1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:

Maintenance item No.

Contents Factory setting

U254U255U256

U258

U260U342U348

Turning auto start function on/offSetting auto clear timeTurning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off Switching copy operation at toner empty detectionempty detectionChanging the copy count timingSetting the ejection restrictionSetting the copy density adjustment range

On90 sOn

Single mode, 70

After ejectionOnNormal

1-3-12

2A1/2

1-3-3 Copier managementIn addition to a maintenance function for service, the copier is equipped with a management function which can beoperated by users (mainly by the copier administrator). In this copier management mode, default settings can bechanged.

(1) Executing a copier management item

Press both of the copy exposure adjustment keys for 3 s.

Start

• Executing a default setting item

Select an setting item using the zoom +/- keys.

Press the enter key.

Stop/reset key: onor select "F00" and enter key: on

End

Execute the default setting item (see page 1-3-13)

1-3-13

2A1/2

(2) Default settings

User status report

Outputs the details of the default settings.1. Select “F01” and press the enter key.

User status report is printed out.

Exposure mode

Selects the image mode at power-on.1. Select “F02” and press the enter key.2. Select the exposure mode and press the enter

key.Exposure mode: 1 (auto exposure)/2 (text and photo)/3 (photo)/4 (text)

Exposure steps

Sets the number of exposure steps for the manualexposure mode.1. Select “F03” and press the enter key.2. Select “3 steps” or “5 steps” and press the enter

key.Setting range: 1 (3 steps)/2 (5 steps)

Auto exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposure mode.1. Select “F04” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.

Setting range: 1 to 5

Text and photo original exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure to be used when text and photooriginal is selected for the image mode.1. Select “F05” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.


Photo original exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure to be used when photo originalis selected for the image mode.1. Select “F06” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.


Text original exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure to be used when text original isselected for the image mode.1. Select “F07” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.


Default drawer

Sets the drawer to be selected in case such as afterthe stop/reset key is pressed.1. Select “F08” and press the enter key.2. Select default drawer and enter key: on

Default drawer: 1 (drawer)/2 (optional drawer)Note: This setting item will not be displayed if theoptional drawer is not installed.

Automatic drawer switching

Sets if the automatic drawer switching function isavailable.1. Select “F09” and press the enter key.2. Select “on” or “off” and press the enter key.

Setting range: 1 (on)/2 (off)Note: This setting item will not be displayed if theoptional drawer is not installed.

Drawer paper size

Sets the size of paper loaded in the drawer.1. Select “F10” and press the enter key.2. Select the size of paper and press the enter key.

Paper size: 1 (A4R/81/2" × 14")/2 (A5R/81/2" ×11"R)/3 (Folio/51/2" × 81/2"R)

Optional drawer paper size

Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional drawer.1. Select “F11” and press the enter key.2. Select the size of paper and press the enter key.

Paper size: 1 (A4R/81/2" × 14")/2 (A5R/81/2" ×11"R)/3 (Folio/51/2" × 81/2"R)Note: This setting item will not be displayed if theoptional drawer is not installed.

Non-standard size paper for the bypass tray

Sets if non-standard size paper is available when thepaper is fed from the bypass tray.1. Select “F11” and press the enter key.2. Select “on” or “off” and press the enter key.

Setting range: 1 (on)/2 (off)

Non-standard size paper width setting for bypass tray

Sets the paper width when non-standard size is fedfrom the bypass tray.1. Select “F13” and press the enter key.2. Enter the setting and press the enter key.

Setting range is 4.13" to 8.50" (105 to 216 mm).Note: This setting item will not be displayed if “off”is selected in “Non-standard size paper for thebypass tray”.

1-3-14

2A1/2

Copy limit

Sets the limit of the number of copies that can bemade at a time.1. Select “F14” and press the enter key.2. Enter the setting and press the enter key.

Setting range is 1 to 99 copies.

DF auto start

Sets whether copies to be made automatically or notwhen an original is placed in the DF.1. Select “F15” and press the enter key.2. Select “on” or “off” and press the enter key.

Setting range: 1 (on)/2 (off)This setting item is not displayed on the 18 cpmcopier.

Layout (4 in 1)

Sets whether to place the originals vertically orhorizontally for 4 in 1 layout copying.1. Select “F16” and press the enter key.2. Select “vertical” or “horizontal” and press the enter

key.Setting range: 1 (vertical)/2 (horizontal)Note: This setting item will not be displayed on the15 cpm copier if the optional memory board is notinstalled.

Layout (borderline)

Selects the type of borderline for layout copying.1. Select “F17” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.

Setting range: 1 (none)/2 (solid line)/3 (dotted line)Note: This setting item will not be displayed on the15 cpm copier if the optional memory board is notinstalled.

Silent mode

Sets the length of time from when copying ends towhen entering the silent mode.1. Select “F18” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.

Setting range: 1 (0 s)/2 (5 s)/3 (10 s)/4 (15 s)/5 (30 s)

Auto shut-off

Sets if the auto shut-off function is available.1. Select “F19” and press the enter key.2. Select “on” or “off” and press the enter key.


Auto preheat time

Sets the auto preheat time.1. Select “F20” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.

Setting is available between 5 and 45 min. in 5min. steps.Setting range: 1 (5 min.)/2 (10 min.)/3 (15 min.)/4 (20 min.)/5 (25 min.)/6 (30 min.)/7 (35 min.)/8 (40 min.)/9 (45 min.)Sets the auto preheat time to be shorter than theauto shutoff time.

Auto shutoff time

Sets the auto shut-off time.1. Select “F21” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.

Setting is available between 15 and 120 min. in 15min. steps.Setting range: 1 (15 min.)/2 (30 min.)/3 (45 min.)/4 (60 min.)/5 (75 min.)/6 (90 min.)/7 (105 min.)/8 (120 min.)

Preheat recovery time

Selects the mode of the auto preheat function fromrecovery priority mode and power save priority mode.1. Select “F22” and press the enter key.2. Select the priority mode and enter key: on

Priority mode: 1 (recovery priority mode)/2 (power save priority mode)

Viewing total counter value

Displays the total number of copies.1. Select “F23” and press the enter key.

The total number of copies are displayed on thecopy quantity/magnification display.

Toner counter report

Outputs the report on the toner consumption ratio.1. Select “F24” and press the enter key.

The list is printed out.

Toner replacement message output setting

Sets if a message requesting the user to replace thetoner container is printed when the toner is used up.1. Select “F25” and press the enter key.2. Select “on” or “off” and press the enter key.


1-3-15

2A1/2

Paper feed shifting adjustment (drawer)

Adjusts displacement of the copy image.1. Select “F26” and press the enter key.2. Select the setting and press the enter key.

Setting range: -3.0 to +3.0 (1 steps moves 0.1)

Paper feed shifting adjustment (optional drawer)


Setting range: -3.0 to +3.0 (1 steps moves 0.1)This setting item will not displayed if the optionaldrawer is not installed.

Paper feed shifting adjustment (bypass tray)


Setting range: -3.0 to +3.0 (1 steps moves 0.1)Use A4R/81/2" × 11"R size paper.

Inch/metric specifications setting

Switches the copier specifications setting betweeninch and metric.1. Select “F29” and press the enter key.2. Select the specifications setting and press the

enter key.Specifications setting: 1 (inch)/2 (metric)/3 (metric for Japan)

Folio length setting (drawer)

Sets the length when folio is selected as the papersize.1. Select “F30” and press the enter key.2. Select the length and press the enter key.

Length: 1 (210 mm)/2 (216 mm)This setting item is available only when metric isselected for the copier specifications.

Folio length setting (bypass tray)

Sets the length when folio is selected as the papersize.1. Select “F31” and press the enter key.2. Enter the setting and press the enter key.

Setting is available between 200 and 216 mm.This setting item is available only when metric isselected for the copier specifications.

1-3-16

2A1/2

1-3-4 Installing the optional drawer

Procedure1. Remove the tapes, pad and plastic bag from the

optional drawer.

2. Place the copier on top of the optional drawersuch that the right and left covers of the copierbecome flush with the drawer cover.Caution: Two people are required to move the

copier. Stand on the front and rear sidesof the copier and hold it tightly by thehandles on the sides. Carrying the copierstanding on its right and left sides orholding it by the drawer may damage thecopier or cause injury.

3. Insert the power plug of the copier to the walloutlet and turn the main switch on.

Figure 1-3-21

Tape Tapes

Pad

Tapes

Tape

Figure 1-3-22

Optional drawer

Power plug

Figure 1-3-23

1-3-17

2A1/2

4. If installing on a copier set for metricspecifications, pull the optional drawer out as faras it will go and fit the rear paper stops for themetric specifications to the optional drawer.Note: If the rear paper stops for the metric

specifications are not installed, problemssuch as a paper misfeed may occur. (Therear paper stops for the metricspecifications are not necessary whenusing inch-sized paper [81/2" × 14", 81/2" ×11"R or 51/2" × 81/2"R]).

5. Load paper into the cassette.Note: For the details on how to load paper, see

“1. How to load paper” on page 3-1 in theinstruction handbook of the copier.

6. Affix the drawer size label to the drawer coveraccording to the size of paper to be used.Important:Be sure to turn the main switch on before loadingpaper into the optional drawer. Loading paperfirst may cause a paper misfeed when the mainswitch is turned on.

Figure 1-3-24

Rear paper stop for the metric specifications

Rear paper stop for the metric specifications

Figure 1-3-25

Drawer size label

1-3-18

2A1/2

1-3-5 Installing the printer board/network board (option)

Procedure 1. Remove the tape keeping the cover of the printer

board from rotating.

2. Remove the printer cover from the copier byfirmly pressing the part marked with a triangle.

3. Remove the two pins securing the shield coverand then remove the cover.

Tape

Printer board

Figure 1-3-27

Printer cover

Figure 1-3-26

Sheild cover

Pins

Figure 1-3-28

1-3-19

2A1/2

4. Insert the printer board as far as it will go. 5. Secure the printer board to the copier using the

two pins removed in step 3.

6. Remove the knock-out portion of the printer coverby firmly pressing with a tool, such as ascrewdriver, and refit the printer cover to thecopier.Note: The printer cover may not be able to be

refit depending on the type of printer cable.In this case, use the copier without fittingthe printer cover.

Printer boardPins

Figure 1-3-29

Knock-outportion

Printer cover

Figure 1-3-30

1-3-20

2A1/2

Installing the optional network board 1. Remove the two pins securing the option plate on

the printer board and then remove the plate.

2. Insert the network board along the rails as far asit will go.

3. Secure the network board using the two pins.

4. Remove the knock-out portion of the printer coverby firmly pressing with a tool, such as ascrewdriver, and refit the printer cover to thecopier.

Option platePins

Figure 1-3-31

Network boardPins

Figure 1-3-33

Knock-outportion

Printer cover

Figure 1-3-32

1-3-21

2A1/2

1-3-6 Installing the memory board (standard for 18 cpm/optional for 15 cpm)

Note: Make sure that the DIMM is securely insertedon the memory board before startinginstallation.

Procedure 1. Remove the printer cover from the copier by

firmly pressing the part marked with a triangle.

2. Remove the two pins securing the cover on thecopier and then remove the cover.

Printer cover

Figure 1-3-34

Cover

Pins

Figure 1-3-35

1-3-22

2A1/2

3. Insert the memory board as far as it will go. 4. Secure the memory board using the two pins

removed in step 2.

5. Refit the printer cover to the copier.

Memory board

Pins

Figure 1-3-36

Printer cover

Figure 1-3-37

2A1/2

1-4-1

1-4-1 Maintenance mode

The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) Executing a maintenance item

Caution:Do not perform aging without the waste toner tank installed during maintenance service.

Start

Enter the number of the maintenance item to be executed using the copy exposure adjustment keys or the zoom +/- keys.

Press the start key.

Press the stop/reset key.

The maintenance item is run.


Enter 001 using the copy exposure adjustment keys or the zoom +/- keys, and press the start key.

End

· · · · · · · Entering the maintenance mode

· · · · · · · Selecting a maintenance item

· · · · · · · Exiting the maintenance mode

Yes

No

No

Run another maintenance mode?

YesRun the item again?

Press the stop/reset key, start keyand the left copy exposure adjustmentkey in the order presented and hold them down.

2A1/2

1-4-2

General

Initialization

Drive, paperfeed, paperconveying andcooling system

Optical

U000 Outputting an own-status report —

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode —

U004 Setting the machine number —

U005 Copying without paper —

U020 Initializing all data —

U021 Initializing memories —

U022 Initializing backup data —

U030 Checking motor operation —

U031 Checking switches for paper conveying —

U032 Checking clutch operation —

U033 Checking solenoid operation —

U034 Adjusting the print start timing• Adjusting the leading edge registration 0• Adjusting the center line 0

U035 Setting folio size• Length 330• Width 210

U042 Setting the LSU type b

U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper• Drawer 0• Bypass tray 0• Optional drawer 0

U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed• Drive motor 0• Polygon motor 0• ST feed motor 0

U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties 12

U061 Turning the exposure lamp on —

U063 Adjusting the shading position 0

U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification• Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction 0

U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the 0contact glass

U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass 0

U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DF 2

U070 Adjusting the DF magnification 0

U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing• Adjusting leading edge registration 0• Adjusting trailing edge registration 0

U072 Adjusting the DF center line 0

U073 Checking scanner operation —

U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity 0

U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off• Setting the mode on/off On• Setting the reference data for identifying dust 35

U088 Setting the input filter (moiré reduction mode) Off

U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern —

U091 Checking shading —

U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically —

U093 Setting the exposure density gradient• Text/text and photo/photo mode 0

* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020

SectionItem

Maintenance item contentsInitial

No. setting*

(2) Maintenance mode item list

2A1/2

1-4-3

SectionItem


No. setting*High voltage

Developing

Fixing andcleaning

Operationpanel andsupportequipment

Mode setting

Imageprocessing

U100 Setting the surface potential 197

U101 Setting high voltages• Developing bias 200/34• Transfer voltage 94• Transfer voltage output timing 256/544

U109 Setting the drum type b

U110 Checking/clearing the drum count —

U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time —

U130 Initial setting for the developer —

U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage 157

U132 Replenishing toner forcibly —

U135 Checking toner feed motor operation —

U155 Displaying the toner sensor output —

U156 Changing the toner control level• Toner feed start level 113• Toner empty level 44

U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time —

U158 Checking/clearing the developing count —

U161 Setting the fixing control temperature• Primary stabilization fixing temperature 125• Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 180

U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly —

U163 Resetting the fixing problem data —

U196 Turning the fixing heater on —

U199 Checking the fixing temperature —

U200 Turning all LEDs on —

U203 Operating DF separately —

U207 Checking the operation panel keys —

U208 Setting the paper size 81/2" × 11"

U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors —

U244 Checking the DF switches —

U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 45

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count —

U252 Setting the destination Inch

U254 Turning auto start function on/off On

U255 Setting auto clear time 90

U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off On

U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Single mode,70

U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection

U265 Setting the destination specifications 0

U332 Setting the size conversion factor —

U342 Setting the ejection restriction On

U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication 0

U348 Setting the copy density adjustment range Normal

U402 Adjusting margins for printing —

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass —

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF —

U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing —


SectionItem


No. setting*

2A1/2

1-4-4

U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations —

U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts —

U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts —

U905 Checking/clearing counts by the DF —

U910 Clearing the black ratio data —

U917 Setting the reading/writing of backup data Read

U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light —

U992 Checking or clearing the printer count —

U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern —

U998 Outputting the memory list —


Others

2A1/2

1-4-5

(3) Contents of maintenance mode items

MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.

U000 Outputting an own-status report

DescriptionOutputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.

PurposeTo check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.Before initializing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter thesettings after initialization or replacement.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display Output list

d-L List of the current settings of the maintenance modesJ-L List of the paper jam occurrencesC-L List of the service call occurrences

3. Press the start key. The test copy mode is entered and a list is output.When A4/11" × 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.When output is complete, the selected item appears.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key while a selection item is displayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance itemNo. appears.

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

DescriptionExits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.

PurposeTo exit the maintenance mode.

MethodPress the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.

U004 Setting the machine number

DescriptionDisplays and changes the machine number.

PurposeTo check or set the machine number.

MethodPress the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.

Setting1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.2. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric or zoom +/– keys.

Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.

Copy exposure indicator Description Setting range Initial setting

Exp. 1 First 3 digits 000 to 999 000Exp. 3 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000

3. Press the start key. The machine number is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/reset key. The indication forselecting a maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-6

U005 Copying without paper

DescriptionSimulates the copy operation without paper feed.

PurposeTo check the overall operation of the machine.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display Operation

P Only the copier operates.P-d Both the copier and DF operate (continuous operation).

3. Press the interrupt key.4. Set the operation conditions required. Changes in the following settings can be made.

• Paper feed locations• Magnifications• Number of copies: continuous copying is performed when set to 99.• Copy density• Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key

5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paperpresent, the paper feed pulley does not operate.

6. Press the start key. The operation starts.Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, theselected item appears.

7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/reset key.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key at the screen for selecting an item. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.

U020 Initializing all data

DescriptionInitializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.

PurposeUsed when replacing the main PCB.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select “on” using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Operation

– – – Canceling initializationon Executing initialization

3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for inch specificationsare set.When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the mainswitch is turned on.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/reset key. The indication forselecting a maintenance item No. appears.

2A1/2

1-4-7


U021 Initializing memories

DescriptionInitializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM accordingto the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.

PurposeUsed to return the machine settings to the factory settings.


Display Operation


3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines isinitialized based on the destination setting. When initialization is complete, the machine automaticallyreturns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

U022 Initializing backup data

DescriptionInitializes only the data set for the engine or scanner section.

PurposeTo be executed after replacing the scanner unit.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item to be initialized using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display Operation

A Engineb Scanner

3. Press the start key.4. Select “on” using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Operation


5. Press the start key. The data for the engine or scanner section (U060 to 099, U403, U404 and U990) isinitialized.



2A1/2

1-4-8

U030 Checking motor operation

DescriptionDrives each motor.

PurposeTo check the operation of each motor.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the motor to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display Motor

A Drive motor (DM)F1 ST feed motor (STFM)*

* Optional

3. Press the start key. The selected motor operates.4. To stop operation, press the stop/reset key.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key after operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

U031 Checking switches for paper conveying

DescriptionDisplays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.

PurposeTo check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.

While each switch is turned on, a segment of the 7-segment display lights. Segments of the 7-segmentdisplay and the switches correspond as follows:

Segments of the 7-segment display Switch

Eject switch (ESW)

Registration switch (RSW)

ST feed switch (STFSW)*

* Optional.


U032 Checking clutch operation

DescriptionTurns each clutch on.

PurposeTo check the operation of each clutch.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the clutch to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.3. Press the start key. The selected clutch turns on for 1 s.

Display Clutch

P1 Paper feed clutch (PFCL)Pb Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)F1 ST paper feed clutch (STPFCL)*2F Registration clutch (RCL)

* Optional.


ON

ON

ON

2A1/2

1-4-9


U033 Checking main switch operation

DescriptionTurns the main switch on by energizing the main switch off solenoid.

PurposeTo check the operation of the main switch off solenoid in auto shutoff mode.

Method1. Press the start key. "A" appears.2. Press the start key. The main switch is turned on.


U034 Adjusting the print start timing

AdjustmentSee pages 1-6-10 and 13.

U035 Setting folio size

DescriptionChanges the image area for copying onto folio size paper.

PurposeTo prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting theactual size of the folio paper used.

MethodPress the start key.

Setting1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.2. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.

Copy exposure indicator Setting Setting range Initial setting

Exp. 1 Length 330 to 356 mm 330Exp. 3 Width 200 to 220 mm 210

3. Press the start key. The value is set.


U042 Setting the LSU type

DescriptionSets the type of the LSU installed in the copier.

PurposeUsed when replacing the LSU.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the LSU type using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

A Type Ab Type bC Type C

Initial setting: b3. Press the start key. The setting is set.


U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper

AdjustmentSee page 1-6-17.


2A1/2

1-4-10

U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed

DescriptionPerforms fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.

PurposeUsed to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.


Setting1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.2. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.


Exp. 1 Drive motor speed adjustment –9.9 to +9.9 0Exp. 3 Polygon motor speed adjustment –9.9 to +9.9 0Exp. 5 ST feed motor* speed adjustment –9.9 to +9.9 0

Drive motor speed adjustment/ST feed motor speed adjustment (unit: %)Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makesthe image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.Polygon motor speed adjustment (unit: %)Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliaryscanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction andlonger in the auxiliary scanning direction.


Test copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in test copy mode.Correct values for an A4/81/2" × 11" output are:A = 260 ± 2.6 mmB = 180 ± 1.8 mm

A

B

Figure 1-4-1

Adjustment1. Press the printer key. The machine enters the test copy mode.2. Press the start key. Output an A4/81/2" × 11" VTC pattern.3. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are

different from the correct sizes:A: Drive motor speed adjustment/ST feed motor speed adjustmentB: Polygon motor speed adjustment


2A1/2

1-4-11


U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties

DescriptionAdjusts the image scanning density.

PurposeUsed when the entire image appears too dark or light.


Setting1. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.

Description Setting range Initial setting

Image scanning density 0 to 23 12

Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Test copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in test copy mode.


CautionThe following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:• Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)• Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode

U061 Turning the exposure lamp on

DescriptionTurns the exposure lamp on.

PurposeTo check the exposure lamp.

Method1. Press the start key. “on” appears.2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/reset key.


U063 Adjusting the shading position

DescriptionChanges the shading position.

PurposeUsed when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This isdue to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should bechanged so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.

Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step

Shading position –15 to +15 0 0.254 mm

Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves theposition toward the machine left.



CompletionPress the stop/reset key at the screen for adjustment. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.


2A1/2

1-4-12

U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification


U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass


U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass


U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DF

DescriptionAdjusts the position for scanning originals from the DF.

PurposeUsed when there is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and the copy image when the DFis used.


Setting1. Change the setting using the zoom +/- keys.


Scanning position –15 to +15 2 0.254 mmfor DF originals

Increasing the setting moves the image backward, and decreasing it moves the image forward.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. Press the printer key. The carriage moves to the scanning position for DF originals.4. Press the stop/reset key. The carriage returns to its home position.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key at the screen for adjustment. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.

U070 Adjusting the DF magnification


2A1/2

1-4-13


U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing


U072 Adjusting the DF center line


U073 Checking scanner operation

DescriptionSimulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.

PurposeTo check scanner operation.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the item to be changed by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment

keys.3. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.

Copy exposure indicator Operating conditions Setting range

Exp. 1 Magnification 50 to 200%Exp. 3 Paper size See below.Exp. 5 On and off of the exposure lamp on or off

Paper size for each setting

Setting Paper size Setting Paper size

9 B5 47 Folio40 A4R 55 81/2" × 14"41 B5R 56 81/2" × 11"R42 A5R 58 51/2" × 81/2"R

4. Press the printer key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.5. To stop operation, press the stop/reset key.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key when scanning stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-14

U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity

DescriptionAdjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DF.

PurposeUsed if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass andwhen scanning an original from the DF.




DF input light luminosity 0 to 8 0

Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.2. Press the start key. The value is set.



2A1/2

1-4-15


U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off

DescriptionTurns on or off the DF scanning position adjust mode, in which the DF original scanning position is adjustedautomatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the referencedata for identifying dust.

ReferenceIn the DF original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by comparingthe scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DF originalscanning position. If dust is identified, the DF original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.

PurposeUsed to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slitglass when the DF is used.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the item to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Copy exposure indicator Description

Exp. 1 Setting the mode on/offExp. 3 Setting the reference data for identifying dust

Setting the mode on/off1. Select “on” or “oFF” using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

on DF scanning position adjust mode onoFF DF scanning position adjust mode off

Initial setting: on

2. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Setting the reference data for identifying dustAvailable only when the mode is turned on.

1. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.


Minimum density to be regarded as dust 10 to 95 35

ExampleThe figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data ofthe level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scandata taken when there is no original).




2A1/2

1-4-16

U088 Setting the input filter (moiré reduction mode)

DescriptionTurns moiré reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and off.

PurposeUsed to prevent regular density unevenness (moiré) on halftone image areas of the copy image in text modeand text and photo mode. Such moiré is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy is madein text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas.


Setting1. Select “on” or “oFF” using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

on Moiré reduction modeoFF Normal copy mode

Initial setting: oFF

If moiré on the copy image is significant, change the setting to “on”. Note that when the moiré reductionmode is turned on, the resolution may be slightly reduced.

2. Press the start key. The value is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern

DescriptionSelects and outputs a MIP-PG pattern created in the copier.

PurposeWhen performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that ofthe scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display Setting Setting range Initial setting

G-5 Gray scale - -180 Mono level 0 to 255 1801-d 1-dot level - -

3. Press the printer key. The machine enters the PG pattern output mode.4. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.


2A1/2

1-4-17


U091 Checking shading

DescriptionPerforms scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the originalscanning values at nine points of the contact glass.

PurposeTo check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to decidethe causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical (shadingor CCD) or other problems.Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.

Method1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item to be operated using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Output list

on Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.oFF Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.

3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.4. Change the measurement point by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash using the copy

exposure adjustment keys. For the correspondence between the measurement points and the copyexposure indicators, see Figure 1-4-2.

100 mm from the machine center toward machine rear

Machine center

100 mm from the machine center toward machine front

150 mm from machine left

200 mm from the machine left

300 mm from machine left

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

Point Copy exposure indicator

1

2

3

4

5: Off

: On

: Flashing

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

Point Copy exposure indicator

6

7

8

9

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

exp.1 exp.3 exp.5

Figure 1-4-2


2A1/2

1-4-18

U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically

DescriptionMakes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)• Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.

PurposeUsed to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.

Method1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A168070) on the contact glass.2. Press the start key. “on” appears.3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, “Gd” appears.4. Display each setting value after adjustment by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure

adjustment keys.

Copy exposure indicator Setting value

Exp. 3 Scanner center lineExp. 5 Scanner leading edge registrationExp. 1 (flashing) Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction

If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, “nG” is displayed and operation stops. Lighting the copyexposure indicator exp. 3 and then exp. 5 using the copy exposure adjustment keys will display the errorcode. Determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjustthe remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key after auto adjustment is complete. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.If the stop/reset key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.

U091(cont.)

When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightlydifferent from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there shouldbe no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front and rearindicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) iscaused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).If a black line appears, the cause may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation beforeshading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation aftershading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it may not be possibleto use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning atthe limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.

5. Press the stop/reset key. The selected item appears.


2A1/2

1-4-19


U093 Setting the exposure density gradient

DescriptionChanges the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,text and photo, photo).

PurposeTo set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used tomake copy image darker or lighter.

Start1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the image mode to be adjusted by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.3. Press the start key. The machine enters the setting mode.

Image mode LEDs Description

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Density in text mode

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Density in text and photo mode

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Density in photo mode

: Off, : On


2A1/2

1-4-20

U093(cont.)

Setting1. Select the item to be adjusted by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment

keys.2. Adjust the setting using the zoom +/– keys.

Copy exposureDescription Setting range Initial settingindicator

Exp. 1 Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0Exp. 3 Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0

Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.

Image density

Density adjustment

Dark

Light

Light Center Dark

Density adjustment range: Special area

Setting: 0Setting: 3

Density adjustment range: Normal

Set to DARKERSet to LIGHTER

Figure 1-4-3 Exposure density gradient

3. Press the start key. The value is set.4. Press the stop/reset key. The selected item appears.



2A1/2

1-4-21


U100 Setting the surface potential

DescriptionChanges the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging.

PurposeTo set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when reentering data after initializing the setdata.

Start1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.


Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Setting the developing bias

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Setting and checking the transfer voltage

: Off, : On

Method for main charger output1. Select the item using the cpoy exposure adjustment keys.

Display (copy exposure indicator) Description

on1 (exp. 1) Turning the main charger onon2 (exp. 3) Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit

on and off

2. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.3. To stop operation, press the stop/reset key.

Setting the grid control voltage1. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.


Grid control voltage 0 to 255 197

Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V



CompletionPress the stop/reset key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed. The indication forselecting a maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-22

U101 Setting high voltages

DescriptionChanges the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the developing bias control voltage andtransfer control voltage. Also checks the transfer output voltage.

PurposeTo check and change high voltages other than the main charger voltage.

Start1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item to be set or checked by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.


Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Setting the developing bias

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Setting and checking the transfer voltage

: Off, : On

Setting the developing bias1. Select the item to be adjusted by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment



Exp. 1 Developing bias control voltage 0 to 255 200during image formation

Exp. 3 Developing bias control voltage 0 to 255 34during no image formation

Increasing the setting makes the developing bias higher and the image darker; decreasing it makes thebias lower and the image lighter.


Setting the transfer voltage1. Select the item to be adjusted by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment



Exp. 1 Transfer control voltage 0 to 255 94Exp. 3 (on) Turning the transfer voltage – –

output onExp. 5 Timing at which the transfer voltage 160 to 360 256

output turns onExp. 1 (flashing) Timing at which the transfer voltage 450 to 650 544

output turns off timing

Increasing the exp. 1 setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.Increasing the exp. 5 setting makes the transfer voltage output timing later and improves paper separationperformance.

3. Press the start key. The value is set.4. To check the transfer voltage output, light the copy exposure indicator exp. 3 using the copy exposure

adjustment keys and press the start key. The currently set transfer voltage is output.5. To stop the transfer voltage output, press the stop/reset key.



2A1/2

1-4-23


U109 Setting the drum type

DescriptionSets the type of the drum installed in the copier.

PurposeTo prevent variations in halftone due to differences in drum sensitivity.


Setting1. Select the drum type using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

A Type Ab Type bC Type Cd Type d

Initial setting: b2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


U110 Checking/clearing the drum count

DescriptionDisplays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the main charger potential output.

PurposeTo check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.


Exp. 1 First 3 digits 000 to 999 000Exp. 3 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000Exp. 5 Clearing the count ——— ———

Clearing1. Light exp. 5.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

Setting1. Change the count using the zoom +/– keys.2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

CompletionTo exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selectinga maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-24

U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time

DescriptionDisplays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the high voltage based on time.

PurposeTo check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.



Exp. 1 First 2 digits 00 to 59 (min) 00Exp. 3 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 (min) 000Exp. 5 Clearing the drive time ——— ———

Clearing1. Light exp. 5.2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

Setting1. Change the drive time (in minutes) using the zoom +/– keys.2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance No. appears.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selectinga maintenance item No. appears.

U130 Initial setting for the developer

DescriptionAutomatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start level for the installed developer.

PurposeTo set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or replacing the developer.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and the result is displayed.3. Display the setting value for each item by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy

exposure adjustment keys.


Exp. 1 Toner sensor output valueExp. 3 Toner sensor control voltageExp. 5 Toner feed start levelExp. 1 (flashing) Absolute humidity

SupplementThe following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:• Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)• Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)• Clearing the developing drive time (U157)• Clearing the developing count (U158)• Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection

CompletionAfter initial setting is complete, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.

2A1/2

1-4-25


U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage

DescriptionDisplays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in maintenance item U130.

PurposeTo check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to change the toner density if an image is toodark or light.

MethodPress the start key. The current setting for the toner sensor control voltage is displayed.



Toner sensor control voltage 0 to 255 157

Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it makes the density lower.Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.



U132 Replenishing toner forcibly

DescriptionReplenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.

PurposeUsed when the toner empty is detected frequently.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.

Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.3. Display each data by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment

keys.


Exp. 1 Toner sensor output value after start key is pressedExp. 3 Current toner feed start levelExp. 5 Current toner sensor control voltageExp. 1 (flashing) Absolute humidity

4. To stop operation, press the stop/reset key.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key when toner replenishment stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.

U135 Checking toner feed motor operation

DescriptionDrives the toner feed motor.

PurposeTo check the operation of the toner feed motor.

CautionNote that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam, resulting in machine lockup. Be sure todrive the motor for only a few seconds.

Method1. Press the start key. “on” appears.2. Press the start key. The toner feed motor turns on.3. To stop operation, press the stop/reset key.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key when operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-26

U155 Displaying the toner sensor output

DescriptionDisplays the toner sensor output value, and related data.

PurposeTo check the toner sensor output value.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Press the start key. Sampling starts.3. Display each data by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment

keys.


Exp. 1 Toner sensor output value after start key is pressedExp. 3 Current toner feed level (value corrected based on humidity

and drive time)Exp. 5 Current toner sensor control voltageExp. 1 (flashing) Absolute humidity

4. Press the stop/reset key. The sampling operation stops.


U156 Changing the toner control level

DescriptionChanges the toner feed start level set in maintenance item U130 or the toner empty level to be determined bythe difference from the toner feed start level.

PurposeTo check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.



Exp. 1 Toner feed start levelExp. 3 Difference between the toner feed start level and toner empty

level

Setting for the toner feed start level1. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.


Toner feed start level 0 to 255 113

Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting for the toner empty level1. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.


Difference between the toner feed start level 0 to 255 44and the toner empty level

Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner density is lower when the toner emptyis detected.



2A1/2

1-4-27


U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time

DescriptionDisplays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a referencewhen correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.

PurposeTo check the developing drive time after replacing the developer.



Exp. 1 First 2 digits 00 to 59 (min) 00Exp. 3 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 (min) 000Exp. 5 Clearing the drive time ——— ———

Clearing1. Light exp. 5.2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

Setting1. Change the drive time (in minutes) using the zoom +/– keys.2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selectinga maintenance item No. appears.

U158 Checking/clearing the developing count

DescriptionDisplays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.

PurposeTo check the developing count after replacing the developer.





Setting1. Change the count using the zoom +/– keys.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selectinga maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-28

U161 Setting the fixing control temperature

DescriptionChanges the fixing control temperature.

PurposeNormally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve afixing problem on thick paper.

MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.

Setting1. Select the item to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.2. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.

Copy exposureDescription Setting range Initial setting

indicator

Exp. 1 Primary stabilization fixing temperature 100 to 165 (°C) 125Exp. 3 Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 155 to 195 (°C) 180

The temperatures are to be set such that exp. 3 ≥ exp. 1.3. Press the start key. The value is set.


U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly

DescriptionStops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.

PurposeTo forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.

Method1. Press the start key. “on” appears.2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless

of fixing temperature. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.


U163 Resetting the fixing problem data

DescriptionResets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.

PurposeTo prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.

Method1. Press the start key. “CLE” appears.2. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.


2A1/2

1-4-29


U196 Turning the fixing heater on

DescriptionTurns the fixing heater on.

PurposeTo check fixing heater.

Method1. Press the start key. “on” appears.2. Press the start key. The fixing heater turns on for 1 s and then turns off.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key when fixing heater is off. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

U199 Checking the fixing temperature

DescriptionDisplays the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.

PurposeTo check the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Display each temperature by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure

adjustment keys.


Exp. 1 Fixing temperature (°C)Exp. 3 Ambient temperature (°C)


U200 Turning all LEDs on

DescriptionTurns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.

PurposeTo check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.

MethodPress the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.Press the stop/reset key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the indication for selecting a maintenanceitem No. appears.

U203 Operating DF separately

DescriptionSimulates the original conveying operation separately in the DF.

PurposeTo check the DF.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Place an original in the DF if running this simulation with paper.3. Select the item to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display (copy exposure indicator) Operation

d-P (exp. 1) With paper, single-sided originald-n (exp. 3) Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)

4. Press the start key. The operation starts.5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/reset key.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key when the operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.appears.


2A1/2

1-4-30

U207 Checking the operation panel keys

DescriptionChecks operation of the operation panel keys.

PurposeTo check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.

Method1. Press the start key.2. “1” appears on the copy quantity display and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.3. As the keys on the operation panel are pressed in order from the left to right, the figure shown on the copy

quantity display increases in increments of 1. If there is an LED corresponding to the key pressed, the LEDwill light.

4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.

CompletionPress the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.• After this check starts, the operation cannot be canceled until all the keys are checked.

U208 Setting the paper size

DescriptionSets the size of paer loaded in the drawer.

PurposeUsed when changed the paper size in the drawer.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the paper source by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Copy exposure indicator Paper source

Exp.1 Paper size in the drawerExp.3 Paper size in the optional drawer

3. Select the paper size using the zoom +/- keys.

Display Paper size

A4r/814 A4R/81/2" × 14"A5r/811 A5R/81/2" × 11"Rb5r/FOL 5H8 B5R/Folio 51/2" × 81/2"R

4.Press the start key. The setting is set.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance mode without the current setting, press the stop/reset key while a selection item isdisplayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors

DescriptionTurns the motors in the DF on.

PurposeTo check the operation of the DF motors.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the motor to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.3. Press the start key. The operation starts.

Indication (copy exposure indicator) ADF SDF

F-0 (exp. 1) Drives the original feed system. Turns the DF changesolenoid on.

C-0 (exp. 2) Drives the original conveying Drives the originalsystem. conveying system.

4. To turn each motor off, press the stop/reset key.


2A1/2

1-4-31


U244 Checking the DF switches

DescriptionDisplays the status of the switches in the DF.

PurposeTo check if switches in the DF operate correctly.

Method1. Press the start key. "-5-" appears.2. Manually turn on and off each switch to check the status. When the on-status of a switch is detected, the

image mode LED corresponding to the operated switch lights.


Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Original set switch (OSSW)

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. DF timing switch (DFTSW)

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Safety switch (SSW)

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. DF safety switch (DFSSW)

: Off, : On


U250 Setting the maintenance cycle

DescriptionDisplays and changes the maintenance cycle.

PurposeTo check and change the maintenance cycle.

MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed as follows:Maintenance cycle (number of copies) = setting × 1000



Maintenance cycle 0 to 600 45 1000 (copies)

For example, when set to 120, the maintenance cycle is set to 120000.2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.



2A1/2

1-4-32

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count

DescriptionDisplays, clears and changes the maintenance count.

PurposeTo check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.





Setting1. Change the count using the zoom +/– keys.2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selectinga maintenance item No. appears.

U252 Setting the destination

DescriptionSwitches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.

PurposeTo be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by runningmaintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.


Setting1. Select the destination using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

JPn Metric (Japan) specificationsInc Inch (North America) specificationsEUP Metric (Europe) specificationsASA Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications

2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as whenthe power is turned on.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/reset key. The indication forselecting a maintenance item No. appears.

2A1/2

1-4-33


U254 Turning auto start function on/off

DescriptionSelects if the auto start function is turned on.

PurposeNormally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve theproblem.


Setting1. Select either “on” or “oFF” using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

on Auto start function onoFF Auto start function off

Initial setting: on2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.



2A1/2

1-4-34

U255 Setting auto clear time

DescriptionSets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.

PurposeTo be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the samesettings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.

MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.



Auto clear time 0 to 270 90

The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.

2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off

DescriptionSelects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.

PurposeAccording to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without therecovery time from preheat mode.



Display Description

on Auto preheat/energy saver function onoFF Auto preheat/energy saver function off

Initial setting: on2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

When the setting is changed from “oFF” to “on”, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15minutes.


2A1/2

1-4-35


U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection

DescriptionSelects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that canbe made after the detection.


Start1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.2. Select the item by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.


Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Switching copy operation at toner empty detection betweensingle or continuous copying

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Setting the number of copies after toner empty detection

: Off, : On

Setting copy operation at toner empty detection between single and continuous copying1. Select single or continuous copying using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

Sin Enables only single copying.Con Enables single and continuous copying.

Initial setting: Sin2. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Setting the number of copies after toner empty detection1. Set the number of copies that can be made using the zoom +/– keys.


Number of copies after toner empty detection 0 to 200 (copies) 70

The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous copying.

2. Press the start key.



2A1/2

1-4-36

U260 Changing the copy count timing

DescriptionChanges the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.

PurposeTo be set according to user (copy service provider) request.If a paper jam occurs frequently in the eject section when the number of copies is counted at the time of paperejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is countedbefore the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, thecopy timing should be made later.


Setting1. Select the copy count timing using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

FEd When secondary paper feed startsEJE When the paper is ejected

Initial setting: EJE2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


U265 Setting the destination specifications

DescriptionSets whether or not to print the product name on the reports that users print.

PurposeTo be set according to user request.

MethodPress the start key. The current setting appears.

Setting1. Enter “0” or “2” using the zoom +/– keys.

Setting Description

0 Product name printed2 Product name not printed

Initial setting: 02. Press the start key. The setting is set.


2A1/2

1-4-37


Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp.

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp.

U332 Setting the size conversion factor

DescriptionSets the factor for converting each paper size into A4/11" × 81/2". The black ratio is converted for the A4/11" × 81/2" size using the factor set in this maintenance item. Values set are displayed in the user simulation.

PurposeTo set the factor to convert the black ratio of each paper size for A4/11" × 81/2" size.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select copier or printer mode by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.3. Select the paper size to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash using the copy


Metric specifications

Image mode LEDsCopy exposure

Paper size Setting rangeInitial

indicator setting

Setting for the copier mode Exp. 1 (lit) A4R 0.0 to 3.0 1.0Exp. 3 (lit) B5R 0.0 to 3.0 0.7Exp. 5 (lit) A5R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 1 (flashing) B6R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 3 (flashing) A6R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 5 (flashing) Postcard 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 1 (flashing) Folio 0.0 to 3.0 1.5Exp. 3 (flashing) Non-standard 0.0 to 3.0 1.0

Setting for the printer mode Exp. 1 (lit) A4R 0.0 to 3.0 1.0Exp. 3 (lit) B5R 0.0 to 3.0 0.7Exp. 5 (lit) A5R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 1 (flashing) B6R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 3 (flashing) A6R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 5 (flashing) Postcard 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 1 (flashing) Folio 0.0 to 3.0 1.5Exp. 3 (flashing) Non-standard 0.0 to 3.0 1.0

: Off, : On

Inch specifications

Image mode LEDsCopy exposure

Paper size Setting rangeInitial

indicator setting

Setting for the copier mode Exp. 1 (lit) 81/2" × 14" 0.0 to 3.0 1.5Exp. 3 (lit) 81/2" × 11"R 0.0 to 3.0 1.0Exp. 5 (lit) 51/2" × 81/2"R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 1 (flashing) Non-standard 0.0 to 3.0 1.0

Setting for the printer mode Exp. 1 (lit) 81/2" × 14" 0.0 to 3.0 1.5Exp. 3 (lit) 81/2" × 11"R 0.0 to 3.0 1.0Exp. 5 (lit) 51/2" × 81/2"R 0.0 to 3.0 0.5Exp. 1 (flashing) Non-standard 0.0 to 3.0 1.0

: Off, : On4. Change the setting using the zoom +/– keys.5. Press the start key. The value is set.



2A1/2

1-4-38

U342 Setting the ejection restriction

DescriptionSets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously.When the restriction is set, the number of sheets that can be ejected continuously to the internal eject tray willbe limited to 100.

PurposeAccording to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.



Display Description

on The number of sheets restricted.oFF The number of sheets not restricted.

Initial setting: on2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

DescriptionSets when to indicate that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the number of copies thatcan be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenancecount reaches the set value, the maintenance indicator flashes.

PurposeTo change the time to display the maintenance due indication.


Setting1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.


Exp. 1 First digit 0 to 9 0Exp. 3 Last 3 digits 000 to 999 000

2. Change the setting value using the zoom +/– keys.3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-39


U348 Setting the copy density adjustment range

DescriptionSelects the adjustment range for copy density from NORMAL and SPECIAL AREA (for wider range).

PurposeTo change the setting according to user request.When especially dark or light density is requested, set to SPECIAL AREA.


Setting1. Select the density range using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

SPC (special area) 5 steps (enlargement mode)nrL (normal) 3 steps

Initial setting: Normal2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


U402 Adjusting margins of image printing


U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass


U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF


U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing



2A1/2

1-4-40

U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations

DescriptionDisplays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.

PurposeTo check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the paper feed location (group No.) for which the count is to be checked or cleared by lighting image

mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.3. Change the indication of the copy quantity display by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy


Image mode LED (group No.)Copy exposure

Copy quantity display (count value)indicator

1

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Exp. 1 First 3 digits of bypass copy count

Exp. 3 Last 3 digits of bypass copy count

Exp. 5 Clearing the count (CLE)

2

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Exp. 1 First 3 digits of the drawer copy count

Exp. 3 Last 3 digits of the drawer copy count


3

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Exp. 1 First 3 digits of the optional drawer copy

count

Exp. 3 Last 3 digits of the optional drawer copy

count


4

Photo

Text

Text & Photo

AutoExp. Exp. 1 Clearing all counts (CLE)

: Off, : OnNote: When no optional paper feed device is installed, the counts corresponding to optional paper feed

devices will not appear.

Clearing copy counts by paper feed locations1. Select the paper feed location to clear the count.2. Light exp. 5 using the copy exposure adjustment key.3. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Clearing copy counts for all paper feed locations1. Select group 4.2. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.


2A1/2

1-4-41


U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts

DescriptionDisplays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.

PurposeTo check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Display the jam code to check the count using the copy exposure adjustment keys.3. Press the start key. The jam count appears. If the jam count is a 4-digit value, the first digit and the last 3

digits are displayed alternately.4. Press the stop/reset key. The jam code appears again.

Copy exposure adjustment keys

J10

10

Stop/reset key

Start key

J11


CLE

100

Stop/reset key

Start key


Figure 1-4-4

Clearing all jam counts1. Display “CLE” using the copy exposure adjustment keys. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually.2. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.


U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts

DescriptionDisplays or clears the service call code counts by types.

PurposeTo check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacingconsumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Display the service call code to check the count using the copy exposure adjustment keys.3. Press the start key. The service call count appears. If the service call count is a 4-digit value, the first digit

and the last 3 digits are displayed alternately.4. Press the stop/reset key. The service call code appears again.


010

10

Stop/reset key

Start key

011


CLE

100

Stop/reset key

Start key


Figure 1-4-5

Clearing counts by service call codes1. Display the service call code to clear the count.2. Press the stop/reset key. The count is cleared.

Clearing all service call counts1. Display “CLE” using the copy exposure adjustment keys.2. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.



2A1/2

1-4-42

U905 Checking/clearing counts by the DF

DescriptionDisplays or clears the counts of the DF.

PurposeTo check the use of the DF. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Change the indication of the copy quantity display by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy


Copy exposure indicator Copy quantity display (count value)

Exp. 1 First 3 digits of the number of original replacementExp. 3 Last 3 digits of the number of original replacementExp. 5 Clearing the count (CLE)

Clearing1. Light exp. 3 using the copy exposure adjustment keys.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.


2A1/2

1-4-43


U910 Clearing the black ratio data

DescriptionClears the accumulated black ratio data for A4/11" × 81/2" sheets.

PurposeTo clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.


Display Operation

– – – Canceling the clearingon Executing the clearing

3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without clearing the data, press the stop/reset key. The indication for selecting amaintenance item No. appears.

U917 Setting the reading/writing of backup data

DescriptionSelects whether to read out the backup data on the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB or towrite backup data on the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB to the main PCB.When the memory is initialized (maintenance items U020, U021, U022 and U252), this is set to read out thebackup data from the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB. To write the backup data to the mainPCB from the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB, change the setting before starting writing.

PurposeUsed when replacing the main PCB.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select “rd” or “rE” using the zoom +/– keys.

Display Description

rd Reading out the backup datarE Writing the backup data

3. Press the start key.



2A1/2

1-4-44

U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light

DescriptionDisplays or clears the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.

PurposeTo check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp afterreplacement.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Change the indication of the copy quantity display by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy


Copy exposure indicator Copy quantity display

Exp. 1 First 3 digits of the lamp-on time (minutes)Exp. 3 Last 3 digits of the lamp-on time (minutes)Exp. 5 Clearing the lamp-on time (CLE)

Clearing1. Light exp. 5.2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item

No. appears.

CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/reset key. The indicationfor selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

U992 Checking or clearing the printer count

DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the print count of the printer function when the optional printer board is installed.

PurposeTo check the use of the printer function.




Clearing1. Light exp. 5.2. Press the start key. The value is cleared and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

Setting1. Change the count using the zoom +/– keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.


2A1/2

1-4-45


U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern

DescriptionSelects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the copier.

PurposeWhen performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that ofthe scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern.

Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Display PG pattern to be output Purpose

0 • Center line adjustment

1 • Lateral squareness adjustment• Magnification adjustment

2 • Checking the fixing performance (fixing pressure)

3. Press the printer key. The machine enters the PG pattern output mode.4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.



2A1/2

1-4-46

U998 Outputting the memory list

DescriptionOutputs the list of memory.

PurposeTo output the list as required.


Entering the address1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Copy exposure indicator Description Setting range

Exp. 1 Bit 16 to bit 23 of the address 00 to FFExp. 3 Bit 8 to bit 15 of the address 00 to FFExp. 5 Bit 0 to bit 7 of the address 00 to FF

2. Enter the address in hexadecimal using the zoom +/- keys.3. Press the start key. The address is set.

Printing the list1. Press the printer key. The machine enters the list output mode.2. Press the start key. The list is printed.


2A1/2

1-5-1

1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection

(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen a paper misfeed occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the paper conveying cover or pull the drawer out.To remove original jammed in the DF, open the DF original switchback cover.Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.

1 Misfeed in paper feed section2 Misfeed in paper conveying section3 Misfeed in DF4 Misfeed in optional drawer

Figure 1-5-1

Table 1-5-1

4123

Jam code Contents See pape

PFPFPF152022304050707273

P.1-5-3P.1-5-3P.1-5-3P.1-5-3P.1-5-3P.1-5-4P.1-5-4P.1-5-4P.1-5-4P.1-5-5P.1-5-5P.1-5-5

No paper feed from drawerNo paper feed from optional drawerNo paper feed from bypassMisfeed in copier vertical paper conveying sectionMultiple sheets in copier paper feed sectionMultiple sheets in bypass trayMisfeed in registration/transfer sectionMisfeed in fixing sectionMisfeed in eject sectionNo original feed An original jam in the original feed and conveying section 1 An original jam in the original feed and conveying section 2

2A1/2

1-5-2

(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions

Figure 1-5-2

RSW

ESW

DFTSW

• SDF (15 cpm copier)

• ADF (18 cpm copier)

DFTSW

STFSW

2A1/2

1-5-3

1. Jam at power-on• One or more of the switches in the paper feed conveying system is on when the main switch is turned on (jam code 00).

2. Paper feed section• No paper feed from drawer (“PF” appears on the copy quantity display.)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1255 ms of the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on.

PFCL OFF

ON

OFF

ON

RSW1255 ms

Timing chart 1-5-1

• No paper feed from optional drawer (“PF” appears on the copy quantity display.)The ST feed switch* (STFSW) does not turn on within 1327 ms of the ST paper feed clutch* (STPFCL) turning on.

STPFCL* OFF

ON

OFF

ON

STFSW*1327 ms

Timing chart 1-5-2

• No paper feed from bypass (“PF” appears on the copy quantity display.)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1390 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on.

BYPPFCL OFF

ON

OFF

ON

RSW1390 ms

Timing chart 1-5-3

• Misfeed in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 15)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 2590 ms of the ST feed switch* (STFSW) turning on (when paper isfed from optional drawer).

STFSW* OFF

ON

OFF

ON

RSW2590 ms

Timing chart 1-5-4

• Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section (jam code 20)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2273ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the drawer).

RSW OFF

ONPaper size + 2273 ms

Timing chart 1-5-5

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-4

The ST feed switch* (STFSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2273ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the optional drawer).

STFSW* OFF

ONPaper size + 2273 ms

Timing chart 1-5-6

• Multiple sheets in bypass tray (jam code 22)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 5055 ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the bypass tray).

RSW OFF

ON5055 ms

Timing chart 1-5-7

3. Paper conveying section• Misfeed in registration/transfer section (jam code 30)The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2590 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

RCLOFF

ON

OFF

ONRSW 2590 ms

Timing chart 1-5-8

4. Fixing section• Misfeed in fixing sectionThe eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 2809 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

RCL OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ESW2809 ms

Timing chart 1-5-9

5. Eject section• Misfeed in eject sectionThe eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 2809 ms of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.

RSW

OFF

ON

OFF

ONESW2809 ms

Timing chart 1-5-10

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-5

6. DF• No original feed (jam code 70)During the primary feed of the second or subsequent originals, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn on within thespecified number of original feed motor (OFM) pulses after the original feed motor (OFM) turns on. The DF timing switch(DFTSW) still fails to turn on after up to 5 retries (ADF)/3 retries (SDF) of the original feed operation.

OFM OFF

ON

OFF

ON

DFTSWSpecified number of pulses*

*: SDF: 1386 P (800 ms) ADF (1): 7707 P (2200 ms) ADF (2 - 5): 5605 P (1600 ms)

Timing chart 1-5-11

• An original jam in the original feed and conveying sections 1 (jam code 72)During the secondary original feed, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn off within the specified number of originalfeed motor (OFM) pulses after turning on.

DFTSW OFF

ONSpecified number of pulses*

*: SDF: 8400 P (4849 ms) ADF: 6476 P (time varies depending on the magnification)

Timing chart 1-5-12

• An original jam in the original feed and conveying sections 2 (jam code 73)During the secondary original feed, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns off within the specified number of original feed motor(OFM) pulses after turning on.

DFTSW OFF

ONSpecified number of pulses*

*: SDF: 2217 P (1280 ms) ADF: 1393 P (time varies depending on the magnification)

Timing chart 1-5-13

2A1/2

1-5-6

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(3) Paper misfeeds

(1)A paper jam in thepaper feed,conveying, fixing oreject section isindicated as soon asthe main switch isturned on.

(2)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from drawer).“PF” appears on thecopy quantitydisplay.

(3)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from optionaldrawer*).“PF” appears on thecopy quantitydisplay.

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround the registrationswitch, the ST feed switch*,eject switch or the DF timingswitch.

Defective registrationswitch.

Defective ST feed switch*.

Defective eject switch.

Defective DF timingswitch.

Paper in the drawer isextremely curled.

Check if the paper feedpulleys are deformed.

Broken registration switchactuator.


Check if the paper feedclutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thepaper feed clutch.

Paper in the optionaldrawer* is extremelycurled.

Check if the paper feedpulleys of optional drawer*are deformed.

Broken ST feed switch*actuator.


Check if the ST paper feedclutch* malfunctions.

Electrical problem with theST paper feed clutch*.

Check visually and remove any found.

With 5 V DC present at CN3-14 on the main PCB, check if CN3-13 on the main PCB remains low when the registration switch isturned on and off. If it does, replace the registration switch.

With 5 V DC present at CN5-9 on the main PCB, check if CN5-2on the main PCB remains low when the ST feed switch* isturned on and off. If it does, replace the ST feed switch*.

With 5 V DC present at CN11-6 on the main PCB, check ifCN12-5 on the main PCB remains low when the eject switch isturned on and off. If it does, replace the eject switch.

With 5 V DC present at CN11-11 on the main PCB, check ifCN11-10 on the main PCB remains low when the DF timingswitch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the DF timingswitch.

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed. (see page 1-6-3).

Check visually and replace the registration switch if its actuatoris broken.


Check and remedy if necessary.

Check (see page 1-5-24).

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed (see page 1-6-5).

Check visually and replace the ST feed switch* if its actuator isbroken.




*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-7


(4)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from bypass).“PF” appears on thecopy quantitydisplay.

(5)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam incopier vertical paperconveying section).Jam code 15

(6)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in paper feedsection).Jam code 20

(7)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in bypass).Jam code 22

Paper in the bypass tray isextremely curled.

Check if the bypass paperfeed pulleys are deformed.



Check if the bypass paperfeed clutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with thebypass paper feed clutch.







Check if the right and leftregistration rollers contacteach other.





Check if the right and leftregistration rollers contacteach other.

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed (see page 1-6-9).


With 5 V DC present at CN3-14 on the main PCB, check if CN3-13 on the main PCB remains low when the registration switch isturned on and off. If not, replace the registration switch.



Check visually and replace the ST feed switch* if its actuator isbroken.






Check visually and remedy if necessary.

Check visually and replace the drawer feed switch*1 if itsactuator is broken.




Check visually and remedy if necessary.

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-8


(8)A paper jam in thepaper conveyingsection is indicatedduring copying (jamin registration/transfer section).Jam code 30

(9)A paper jam in thefixing section isindicated duringcopying (jam infixing section).Jam code 40

(10)A paper jam in theeject section isindicated duringcopying (jam in ejectsection).Jam code 50

(11)An original jam inthe DF is indicatedduring copying (nooriginal feed).

Check if the registrationclutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with theregistration clutch.



Check if the registrationclutch malfunctions.

Electrical problem with theregistration clutch.

Broken eject switchactuator.




Broken eject switchactuator.


Broken DF timing switchactuator.


Check if the original paperfeed motor ismalfunctioning.

Check if the DF forwardingpulley, DF original feedpulley or DF separationpulley is deformed.







Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator isbroken.




Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator isbroken.


Check visually and replace the DF timing switch if its actuator isbroken.


Check and remedy.

Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed (see pages1-6-45 and 47).

Jam code 70

2A1/2

1-5-9


(12)An original jam inthe DF is indicatedduring copying (Anoriginal jam in theoriginal feed andconveying sections).Jam code 72, 73

Broken DF timing switchactuator.


Check if the original paperfeed motor ismalfunctioning.

Check if the DF forwardingpulley, DF original feedpulley or DF separationpulley is deformed.

Check visually and replace the DF timing switch if its actuator isbroken.


Check and remedy.

Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed (see pages1-6-45 and 47).

2A1/2

1-5-10

1-5-2 Self-diagnosis

(1) Self-diagnostic functionThis unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled. "C" and a numberbetween 011 and 731 altenates, indicating the nature of the problem.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switch off and back on.

(2) Self diagnostic codes

Code ContentsRemarks

Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

C011

C021

C040

C041

C043

Backup memory data problem• Data in the specified area of the

backup memory does not match thespecified values.

Printer board* communicationproblem• There is no reply after 20 retries at

communication.

DIMM* problem• Information on DIMM cannot be read

out correctly at power-on.

Bitmap problem• There is a problem with the data or

address bus of the bitmap DRAM.

DMA problem• DMA transmission of compressed,

decompressed, rotated, relocated orblanked-out image data does notcomplete within the specified periodof time.

Problem with thebackup memorydata.

Defective backupRAM.

Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.

Defective mainPCB or printerboard.

Poor contact ofthe memoryboard**.

DIMM installedincorrectly.

Defective DIMM.


DIMM installedincorrectly.

Defective DIMM.


Defective mainPCB or memoryboard.

Turn safety switch off and back on and runmaintenance item U020 to set the contentsof the backup memory data again.

If the C011 is displayed after re-setting thebackup memory contents, replace thebackup RAM.

Check the connection of connector CN20on the main PCB and the connector on theprinter board. Repair or replace ifnecessary.

Replace the main PCB or printer board andcheck for correct operation.

Check the insertion of the memory board**.

Check if the DIMM is inserted into thesocket on the memory PCB correctly.

Replace the DIMM and check for correctoperation.


Check if the DIMM is inserted into thesocket on the memory PCB correctly.

Replace the DIMM and check for correctoperation.


Replace the main PCB or memory boardand check for correct operation.

*: Optional. **: Standard for 18 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier.

2A1/2

1-5-11



C100

C104

C310

C400

Exposure lamp problem• Check the CCD input value for the

lighting status of the exposure lamp100 ms after the exposure lamp is litand the carriage is moved to theshading position. If the exposure lampdoes not light, turn off the lamp. After500 ms, light the lamp again and, afurther 500 ms later, check the CCDinput.The exposure lamp does not lightafter 5 retries.

Optical system problem• After AGC, correct input is not

obtained at CCD.

Scanner carriage problem• The home position is not correct

when the power is turned on or at thestart of copying using the contactglass.

Polygon motor synchronizationproblem• The polygon motor does not reach a

stable speed within 19 s of the polygonmotor remote signal turning on.

Poor contact ofthe connectorterminals.

Defectiveexposure lamp.

Defective mainPCB or inverterPCB.

Incorrect shadingposition.

CCD PCB outputproblem.


Defectiveexposure lamp.

Defective mainPCB or inverterPCB.

Incorrect shadingposition.

CCD PCB outputproblem.


Defective scannerhome positionswitch.

Defective mainPCB.

Defective scannermotor.


Defective polygonmotor.

Check the connection of connector CN12on the main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.

Replace the exposure lamp.

Replace the main PCB or inverter PCB andcheck for correct operation.

Adjust the position of the contact glass(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,replace the scanner home position switch.

Replace the ISU.

Check the connection of connector CN12on the main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.

Replace the exposure lamp.

Replace the main PCB or inverter PCB andcheck for correct operation.

Adjust the position of the contact glass(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,replace the scanner home position switch.

Replace the ISU.

Check the connection of connector CN15on the main PCB and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Remedy orreplace if necessary.

Replace the scanner home position switch.

Replace the main PCB and check forcorrect operation.

Replace the scanner motor.

Check the connection of connector CN3 onthe main PCB and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Remedy or replace ifnecessary.

Replace the LSU.

2A1/2

1-5-12



Polygon motor synchronizationproblem• The polygon motor does not reach a

stable speed within 19 s of the polygonmotor remote signal turning on.

Polygon motor steady-state problem• The polygon motor rotation is not

stable for 400 ms after the polygonmotor rotation has been stabilized.

BD steady-state problem• The VTC detects a BD error for 800

ms after the polygon motor rotationhas been stabilizad.

Main charger problem• MC ALM signal is detected

continuously for 800 ms when MCREM signal is turned on.

Broken fixing heater wire• It takes 15 s or more for the fixing

temperature to reach 50°C/122°Fafter the power is turned on or thesafety switch is turned off and on.

• It takes 10 s or more for the fixingtemperature to reach 100°C/212°Ffrom 50°C/122°F.

• It takes 24 s or more for the fixingtemperature to reach the secondarystabilization fixing temperature fromthe primary stabilization fixingtemperature.

Defective powersource PCB.


Defective polygonmotor.

Defective powersource PCB.


Defective LSU.

Defective mainPCB.

Poor contact ofthe high-voltagetransformer PCBconnectorterminals.

Defective high-voltagetransformer PCB.

Leakage duringmain charging.

Deformed high-voltagetransformer PCBterminal spring.

Fixing heaterinstalledincorrectly.

Broken fixingheater wire.

Poor contact inthe fixing unitthermistorconnectorterminals.

Broken fixing unitthermistor wire.

Check if 24 V DC is present at CN1-2 onthe power source PCB. If not, replace thepower source PCB.

Check the connection of connector CN3 onthe main PCB and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Remedy or replace ifnecessary.

Replace the LSU.

Check if 24 V DC is present at CN1-2 onthe power source PCB. If not, replace thepower source PCB.


Replace the LSU.

Replace the main PCB and check forcorrect operation.

Reinsert the connector. Also check forcontinuity within the connector cable. Ifnone, repair or replace the cable.

Replace the high-voltage transformerPCB.

Check and clean the main charger unit.

Replace the spring.

Check and reinstall if necessary.

Check for continuity. If none, replace fixingheater.


Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.

C400

C401

C420

C510

C610

2A1/2

1-5-13



C610

C620

C630

C710

Broken fixing heater wire• It takes 15 s or more for the fixing

temperature to reach 50°C/122°Fafter the power is turned on or thesafety switch is turned off and on.

• It takes 10 s or more for the fixingtemperature to reach 100°C/212°Ffrom 50°C/122°F.

• It takes 24 s or more for the fixingtemperature to reach the secondarystabilization fixing temperature fromthe primary stabilization fixingtemperature.

Abnormally low fixing unitthermistor temperature• The fixing temperature remains below

90°C/194°F for 10 s during copying.

Abnormally high fixing unitthermistor temperature• The fixing temperature exceeds

230°C/446°F for 10 s.

Toner sensor problem• The sensor output voltage is outside

the range of 0.5 to 4.5 V during tonercontrol.

• The toner sensor control voltagecannot be set within the setting rangewhen maintenance item U130 is run.

Fixing unitthermistorinstalledincorrectly.

Fixing unitthermostattriggered.

Fixing heaterinstalledincorrectly.

Broken fixingheater wire.

Poor contact inthe fixing unitthermistorconnectorterminals.


Fixing unitthermistorinstalledincorrectly.

Fixing unitthermostattriggered.

Shorted fixing unitthermistor.

Broken fixingheater controlcircuit on thepower sourcePCB.

Defective tonersensor.

Poor contact ofthe toner sensorconnectorterminals.

Developerproblem.


Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit thermostat.


Check for continuity. If none, replace fixingheater.


Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.


Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit thermostat.

Measure the resistance. If it is 0 Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.

Replace the power source PCB.

Replace the toner sensor.


Replace the developer.

2A1/2

1-5-14



C730

C731

Broken external temperaturethermistor wire• The input voltage is above 4.5 V.

Short-circuited external temperaturethermistor• The input voltage is below 0.5 V.

Poor contact ofthe humiditysensor PCBconnectorterminals.

Defective externaltemperaturethermistor.

Poor contact ofthe humiditysensor PCBconnectorterminals.

Defective externaltemperaturethermistor.


Replace the humidity sensor PCB.


Replace the humidity sensor PCB.

2A1/2

1-5-15

1-5-3 Image formation problems

(20) Image contrast is low(carrier scattering).

See page 1-5-22

(1) No image appears(entirely white).

See page 1-5-16

(2) No image appears(entirely black).

See page 1-5-16

(3) Image is too light.

See page 1-5-17

(4) Background is visible.

See page 1-5-17

(5) A white line appearslongitudinally.

See page 1-5-17

(6) A black line appearslongitudinally.

See page 1-5-18

(7) A black line appearslaterally.

See page 1-5-18

(8) One side of the copyimage is darker thanthe other.

See page 1-5-18

(9) Black dots appear onthe image.

See page 1-5-19

(10) Image is blurred.

See page 1-5-19

(11)The leading edge of theimage is consistentlymisaligned with theoriginal.

See page 1-5-19

(12)The leading edge of theimage is sporadicallymisaligned with theoriginal.

See page 1-5-20

(13)Paper creases.

See page 1-5-20

(14)Offset occurs.

See page 1-5-20

(15) Image is partly missing.

See page 1-5-21

(16)Fixing is poor.

See page 1-5-21

(17) Image is out of focus.

See page 1-5-21

(18) Image center does notalign with the originalcenter.

See page 1-5-22

2A1/2

1-5-16

(1) No image appears(entirely white).

Causes1. No transfer charging.


1. No transfer charging.

A. The connector terminals of the high-voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.

B. Defective main PCB

C. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Check if CN6-8 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance itemU101 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.

Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-8 on the high-voltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 isrun. If not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.


1. No main charging.

A. Broken main charger wire.

B. Leaking main charger housing.

C. The connector terminals of the high-voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.

D. Defective main PCB.

E. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.

2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

A. The connector terminals of the exposurelamp make poor contact.

B. Defective inverter PCB.

C. Defective main PCB.

(2) No image appears(entirely black).

Causes1. No main charging.2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

Replace the main charger unit.

Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.



Check if main charging takes place when CN1-3 on the high-voltagetransformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. Ifnot, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.


Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN2-1 and 2-4 on theinverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,replace the inverter PCB.

Check if CN12-1 and 12-2 on the main PCB go low whenmaintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.

2A1/2

1-5-17


1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.

2. Foreign matter in the developing section.

3. Flawed drum.

4. Dirty shading plate.

(5) A white line appearslongitudinally.

Causes1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.2. Foreign matter in the developing section.3. Flawed drum.4. Dirty shading plate.

(3) Image is toolight.

(4) Background is visible.

Causes1. Insufficient toner.2. Deteriorated developer.3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.


1. Insufficient toner.

2. Deteriorated developer.

3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.

Causes1. Deteriorated developer.


1. Deteriorated developer. Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If ithas reached the specified limit, replace the developer.

If the add toner indicator lights, replace the container.

Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If ithas reached the specified limit, replace the developer.

Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level has been reached,replace the drum (see page 1-6-34).

Clean the main charger wire or, if it is flawed, replace the maincharger unit.

Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. If not, replace thedeveloper.

Replace the drum (see page 1-6-34).

Clean the shading plate.

2A1/2

1-5-18


1. Dirty contact glass.

2. Dirty or flawed drum.

3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

4. Dirty scanner mirror.

(6) A black line appearslongitudinally.

Causes1. Dirty contact glass.2. Dirty or flawed drum.3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.4. Dirty scanner mirror.

Clean the contact glass.

Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-34).

Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-36).

Clean the scanner mirror.


1. Dirty main charger wire.

2. Defective exposure lamp.


1. Flawed drum.

2. Dirty developing section.

3. Leaking main charger housing.

(7) A black line ap-pears laterally.

Causes1. Flawed drum.2. Dirty developing section.3. Leaking main charger housing.

(8) One side of thecopy image isdarker than theother.

Causes1. Dirty main charger wire.2. Defective exposure lamp.

Replace the drum (see page 1-6-34).

Clean any part contaminated with toner or carrier in the developingsection.

Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.

Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the main chargerunit.

Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replacethe exposure lamp (see page 1-6-17).

2A1/2

1-5-19

(11)The leading edge ofthe image is consist-ently misaligned withthe original.

Causes1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge

registration.


1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.

2. Misadjusted scanner leading edgeregistration.

(10)Image is blurred.

(9) Black dots appearon the image.

Causes1. Dirty or flawed drum.2. Dirty contact glass.3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.


1. Dirty or flawed drum.

2. Dirty contact glass.

3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.

Causes1. Scanner moves erratically.2. Deformed press roller.3. Paper conveying section drive problem.


1. Scanner moves erratically.

2. Deformed press roller.

3. Paper conveying section drive problem.

Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scannerrails. If any, remove it.

Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-43).

Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.

Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-13).

Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-6-29).

Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-34).

Clean the contact glass.

Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-36).

2A1/2

1-5-20

(12)The leading edge ofthe image is sporadi-cally misaligned withthe original.

Causes1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch

or paper feed clutch installed or operatingincorrectly.


1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutchor paper feed clutch installed or operatingincorrectly.

Check the installation position and operation of the registrationclutch, bypass paper feed clutch and paper feed clutches. If any ofthem operates incorrectly, replace it.

(14)Offset occurs.

(13)Paper creases. Causes1. Paper curled.2. Paper damp.3. Defective pressure springs.


1. Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions.

2. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.

3. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.

Causes1. Defective cleaning blade.


1. Defective cleaning blade. Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-36).

2A1/2

1-5-21

(17) Image is out offocus.

Causes1. Defective image scanning unit.


1. Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-25).

(15) Image is partly miss-ing.

Causes1. Paper damp.2. Paper creased.3. Drum condensation.4. Flawed drum.


1. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.

2. Paper creased. Replace the paper.

3. Drum condensation. Clean the drum.

4. Flawed drum. Replace the drum (see page 1-6-34).

(16)Fixing is poor. Causes1. Wrong paper.2. Defective pressure springs.3. Flawed press roller.


1. Wrong paper. Check if the paper meets specifications.

2. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.

3. Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-43).

2A1/2

1-5-22

(19) Image contrast islow (carrier scatter-ing).

Causes1. No developing bias output.


1. No developing bias output.

A. Developing bias wire makes poor contact.

B. The connector terminals of the high-voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.

C. Defective main PCB.

D. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.

Check the developing bias wire. If there are any problems, replace it.



Check if developing bias is output when there is no problem with themain PCB while maintenance item U030 is run. If not, replace thehigh-voltage transformer PCB.


1. Misadjusted center line of image printing. Readjust the center line of image printing (see pages 1-6-14).

2. Misadjusted scanner center line. Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-30).

3. Original placed incorrectly. Place the original correctly.

(18) Image center does notalign with the originalcenter.

Causes1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.2. Misadjusted scanner center line.3. Original placed incorrectly.

2A1/2

1-5-23

1-5-4 Electrical problems

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(1)The machine doesnot operate whenthe main switch isturned on.

(2)The drive motordoes not operate .

(3)The scanner motordoes not operate.

(4)The toner feedmotor does notoperate.

(5)Cooling fan motordoes not operate.

No electricity at the poweroutlet.

The power cord is notplugged in properly.

The front cover, paperconveying cover and/or leftcover of the optionaldrawer* are/is not closedcompletely.

Broken power cord.

Defective main switch.

Blown fuse in the powersource PCB.

Defective safety switch.

Defective ST safetyswitch*.

Defective power sourcePCB.

Poor contact in the drivemotor connector terminals.

Broken drive motor gear.

Defective drive motor.

Broken scanner motor coil.

Poor contact in the scan-ner motor connector termi-nals.

Broken toner feed motorcoil.

Poor contact in the tonerfeed motor connector ter-minals.

Broken cooling fan motorcoil.

Poor contact in the coolingfan motor connector termi-nals.

Measure the input voltage.

Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.

Check the front cover, paper conveying cover and left cover ofthe optional drawer*.

Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace themain switch.

Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing andreplace the fuse.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace thesafety switch.

Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the STsafety switch*.

With AC present, check for 5 V DC at CN1-7 on the powersource PCB, 12 V DC at CN1-8 and 24 V DC at CN1-2. If none,replace the power source PCB.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary.

Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor oper-ates when CN13-5 on the main PCB goes low. If not, replace thedrive motor.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the scannermotor.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the tonerfeed motor.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fanmotor.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-24


(6)Original feed motordoes not operate.

(7)ST feed motor*does not operate.

(8)The registrationclutch does notoperate.

(9)The paper feedclutch does notoperate.

(10)The ST paper feedclutch* does notoperate.

(11)The bypass paperfeed clutch does notoperate.

(12)The cleaning lampdoes not turn on.

(13)The exposure lampdoes not turn on.

(14)The exposure lampdoes not turn off.

(15)The fixing heaterdoes not turn on(C610).

Broken Original feed motorcoil.

Poor contact in theOriginal feed motorconnector terminals.

Broken ST feed motor*coil.

Poor contact in the STfeed motor* connectorterminals.

Broken registration clutchcoil.

Poor contact in theregistration clutchconnector terminals.

Broken paper feed clutchcoil.

Poor contact in thepaperfeed clutch connectorterminals.

Broken ST paper feedclutch* coil.

Poor contact in the STpaper feed clutch*connector terminals.

Broken bypass paper feedclutch coil.

Poor contact in the bypasspaper feed clutchconnector terminals.

Poor contact in thecleaning lamp connectorterminals.

Defective cleaning lamp.

Poor contact in theexposure lamp connectorterminals.

Defective inverter PCB.

Defective inverter PCB.

Broken wire in fixingheater.

Fixing unit thermostattriggered.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace Originalfeed motor.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace ST feedmotor*.

Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace theregistration clutch.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paperfeed clutch.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the STpaper feed clutch*.


Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypasspaper feed clutch.



Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.


If the exposure lamp does not turn on when CN12-1 and CN12-2on the main PCB are held low, replace the inverter PCB.

If the exposure lamp does not turn off when CN12-1 and CN12-2on the main PCB are held high, replace the inverter PCB.

Check for continuity across the heater. If none, replace theheater.

Check for continuity across the thermostat. If none, remove thecause and replace the thermostat.

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-25


(15)The fixing heaterdoes not turn on(C610).

(16)The fixing heaterdoes not turn off.

(17)Main charging is notperformed (C510).

(18)Transfer charging isnot performed.

(19)No developing biasis output.

(20)The copier scansthe contact glasswhen originals areloaded on the DF.

(21)A paper jam in thepaper feed, paperconveying or fixingsection is indicatedwhen the mainswitch is turned on.


Dirty sensor part of thefixing unit thermistor.

Broken main charger wire.

Leaking main chargerhousing.

Poor contact in the high-voltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.

Defective main PCB.

Defective high- voltagetransformer PCB .


Defective main PCB.

Defective high-voltagetransformer PCB .

Poor contact in thedeveloping bias wire.


Defective main PCB.

Defective high-voltagetransformer PCB .

Poor contact in the DForiginal detection switchconnector terminals.

Defective DF originaldetection switch.

A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround the registrationswitch, ST feed switch*,eject switch or DF timingswitch.


Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replace the fixing unitthermistor.

Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.

See page 1-5-16.

See page 1-5-16.

See page 1-5-22.


Check if CN11-13 on the main PCB goes low when the DForiginal detection switch is turned on with 5 V DC present atCN11-14 on the main PCB. If not, replace the DF originaldetection switch.

Check and remove if any.


*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-26


(21)A paper jam in thepaper feed, paperconveying or fixingsection is indicatedwhen the mainswitch is turned on.

(22)The messagerequesting covers tobe closed isdisplayed when thefront cover, paperconveying coverand optional drawerleft cover* areclosed.

(23)Others.




Poor contact in theconnector terminals ofsafety switch or ST safetyswitch*.

Defective safety switch orST safety switch*.

Wiring is broken, shortedor makes poor contact.

Noise.





Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If thereis no continuity when the switch is on, replace it.

Check for continuity. If none, repair.

Locate the source of noise and remove.

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-5-27


1-5-5 Mechanical problems

(1)No primary paper feed.

(2)No secondary paperfeed.

(3)Skewed paper feed.

(4)The scanner does nottravel.

(5)Multiple sheets of paperare fed at one time.

(6)Paper jams.

(7)Toner drops on thepaper conveying path.

(8)Abnormal noise isheard.

Check if the surfaces of the following pulleysare dirty with paper powder: paper feedpulleys, ST paper feed pulleys* and bypasspaper feed pulleys.

Check if the paper feed pulleys aredeformed.

Electrical problem with the followingelectromagnetic clutches: paper feed clutch,ST paper feed clutch* and bypass paperfeed clutch.

Check if the surfaces of the left and rightregistration rollers are dirty with paperpowder.

Electrical problem with the registrationclutch.

Deformed width guide in a drawer.

Check if a pressure spring along the paperconveying path is deformed or out of place.

Check if the scanner wire is loose.

The scanner motor malfunctions.

Deformed drawer claw.

Check if the paper is curled.

Check if the paper is excessively curled.

Deformed guides along the paper conveyingpath.

Check if the contact between the right andleft registration rollers is correct.

Check if the press roller is extremely dirty ordeformed.

Check if the contact between the heat rollerand its separation claws is correct.

Check if the developing section of the imageformation unit is extremely dirty.

Check if the pulleys, rollers and gearsoperate smoothly.

Check if the following electromagneticclutches are installed correctly: paper feedclutch, ST paper feed clutch* and bypasspaper feed clutch.

Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

Check visually and replace any deformedpulleys (see page 1-6-3).

See pages 1-5-24.

Clean with isopropyl alcohol.

See page 1-5-24.

Repair or replace if necessary .

Repair or replace.

Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-6-19).

See page 1-5-23.

Check the drawer claw visually and corrector replace if necessary.

Change the paper.

Change the paper.

Check visually and replace any deformedguides.

Check visually and remedy if necessary.Replace the pressure spring if it isdeformed.

Clean or replace the press roller.

Repair if any springs are off the separationclaws.

Clean the developing section of the imageformation unit.

Grease the bearings and gears.

Correct.

*: Optional.

2A1/2

1-6-1

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be

seriously damaged.• Do not perform aging without the waste toner tank installed during maintenance service.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:

Hioki 3200Sanwa MD-180CSanwa YX-360TRBeckman TECH300Beckman DM45Beckman 330*Beckman 3030*Beckman DM850*Fluke 8060A*Arlec DMM1050Arlec YF1030C* Capable of measuring RMS values.

• Prepare the following as test originals:1. NTC (new test chart)2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)

2A1/2

1-6-PB

(2) Running a maintenance item

Start

Enter the number of the maintenance item to be executed using the copy exposure adjustment keys or the zoom +/- keys.



The maintenance item is run.


Enter 001 using the copy exposure adjustment keys or the zoom +/- keys, and press the start key.

End

· · · · · · · Entering the maintenance mode

· · · · · · · Selecting a maintenance item

· · · · · · · Exiting the maintenance mode

Yes

No

No

Run another maintenance mode?

YesRun the item again?

Press the stop/reset key, start keyand the left copy exposure adjustment key in the order presented and hold them down.

2A1/2

1-6-3

1-6-2 Paper feed section

(1) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulleysFollow the procedure below to replace the paper feed pulleys.

Procedure1. Remove the printer cover and rear cover. Pull

out the drawer.2. Remove the four screws and then detach the

high-voltage transfer PCB.

Figure 1-6-1

3. Remove the stop ring and then the paperfeed clutch.

Figure 1-6-2

4. Remove the stop ring snd bushing from thepaper feed shaft unit.

Figure 1-6-3

High-voltage transfer PCB

Stop ring

Paper feed clutch

Stop ring

Bushing

2A1/2

1-6-PB

5. Remove the paper feed shaft unit from thelower front side of the machine.

Figure 1-6-4

6. Remove the screw holding each of the paperfeed pulleys and then the pulleys.

7. Replace the paper feed pulleys and refit allthe removed parts.• Before returning the drawer, turn the main

switch on.• When refitting the paper feed clutch, the

stopper of the paper feed clutch must befirmly into the groove of the machine.

Figure 1-6-5

Paper feed shaft unit

Paper feed pulleys

2A1/2

1-6-5

(2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys and ST paper conveying roller (option)Follow the procedure below to replace the ST paper feed pulleys or ST paper conveying roller.

(2-1) Detaching and refitting the ST paper feed pulleys

Procedure1. Remove the optional drawer from the

machine.2. Remove the screw holding the rear cover of

the optional drawer and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-6

3. Remove the drawer wire from the wireretainer of the upper rear cover.

Figure 1-6-7

4. Remove the four screws holding the upperrear cover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-8

Rear cover

Wire retainer

Drawer wire

Upper rear cover

2A1/2

1-6-PB

5. Open the left cover of the optional drawer.6. Remove the screw holding ST drive motor

PCB.7. Remove the four screws holding the ST

paper feed unit and then the unit.

Figure 1-6-9

8. Remove the stop ring from the rear side ofthe ST paper feed unit and detach the STpaper feed clutch.

Figure 1-6-10

9. Remove the stop ring and bushing.

Figure 1-6-11

ST drive motor PCB

Left cover

ST paper feed unit

ST paper feed clutchStop ring

Stop ringBushing

2A1/2

1-6-7

10. Remove the bushing from the front side of theST paper feed unit and detach the ST paperfeed shaft unit.

Figure 1-6-12

11. Remove the screw holding each of the STpaper feed pulleys and then the pulleys.

12. Replace the ST paper feed pulleys and refitall the removed parts.• When refitting the ST paper feed clutch, the

stopper of the ST paper feed clutch must befirmly into the groove of the machine.

Figure 1-6-13

Bushing

ST paper feed unit

ST paper feed pulleys

2A1/2

1-6-PB

(2-2) Detaching and refitting the ST paper conveying roller

Procedure1. Remove the ST paper feed unit (see page 1-

6-5).2. Remove the stop ring and two gears toward

the rear side of the ST paper feed unit.

Figure 1-6-14

3. Remove the stop ring and the bushing.

Figure 1-6-15

4. Remove the stop ring and bushing from thefront side of the ST paper feed unit anddetach the ST paper conveying roller.

5. Replace the ST paper conveying roller andrefit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-16

Gear

Gear

Stop ring

Stop ring

Bushing

Bushing

Stop ring

ST paper conveying roller

2A1/2

1-6-9

(3) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulleyFollow the procedure below to replace the bypass paper feed pulley.

Procedure1. Remove the printer cover, rear cover and left

cover.2. Remove the image formation unit (see page

1-6-32).3. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-39).4. Remove the screw and then the fulcrum pin.

Figure 1-6-17

5. Remove the paper conveying unit.

Figure 1-6-18

6. Remove the three screws holding the bypasscover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-19

Fulcrum pin

Paper conveying unit

Bypass cover

2A1/2

1-6-PB

7. Remove the stop ring and then the bypasspaper feed clutch.

Figure 1-6-20

8. Remove the stop ring and bushing holdingthe bypass paper feed shaft unit and then theunit.

Figure 1-6-21

9. Remove the grounding plate, bushing andstop ring and then the bypass paper feedpulley.

Figure 1-6-22

Bypass paper feed clutch

Stop ring

Stop ring

Bypass paper feed shaft unit

Bushing

Bypass paper feed pulley

Bushing

Stop ring

Grounding plate

2A1/2

1-6-11

10. Replace the bypass paper feed pulley andrefit all the removed parts.• Refit the bypass paper feed pulley so that

the one-way clutch is machine rear.• When refitting the bypass paper feed shaft

unit, check that the hole in the groundingplate is inserted over the projection underthe bypass lift plate.

• When refitting the paper feed clutch, thestopper of the paper feed clutch must befirmly into the groove of the machine.

Figure 1-6-23

Ground plate

Projection

2A1/2

1-6-PB

Yes

No

Start

Enter maintenance mode.

Enter “034” using the copy exposure adjustment keys or zoom +/- keys.


Press the printer key and the machine enters the test copy mode.

Is the leading edge registration correct?

Press the start key

The new setting is stored

Press the stop/reset key to exit maintenance mode.

End

Select the items to be adjusted usingthe copy exposure adjustment keys.

For output example 1, decrease the value using the zoom (–) key.For output example 2, increase the value using the zoom (+)key.

Setting range: –9.9 – +9.9Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 1.0 mm.

Press the start key to output a test pattern.

Exp. 1 (lit): Leading edge registrationfrom the drawerExp. 3 (lit): Leading edge registrationfrom the bypass tray

(4) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacementPerform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.

(4-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.

U034U066

(P. 1-6-29)U071

(P. 1-6-50)

Caution:Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenancemode.

Procedure

Correct image Output example 1

Output example 2

Leading edge registration

Figure 1-6-24

2A1/2

1-6-13

(4-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leadingedge of the original during memory copying.

U066(P. 1-6-29)

U407U034

(P. 1-6-12)

Caution:Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

Procedure

Original Copy example 1

Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-25

Yes

No

Start





Press the start key and make a test copy.

Is the leading edge registration correct?


The new setting is stored.

Setting range: –10 – +10Initilal setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 1 mm.


End

For copy example 1, decrease the value using the zoom (–) key.For copy example 2, increase the value using the zoom (+) key.

2A1/2

1-6-PB

Yes

No

Start




Press the interrupt key.


Is the image correct?




End

For output example 1, decrease the value using the zoom (–) key.For output example 2, increase the value using the zoom (+) key.

Setting range: –5.0 – +5.0Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 1 mm.

Select the item to be adjusted using the copy exposure adjustment keys.Exp. 5 (lit): Center line from the drawerExp. 1 (flashing): Center line fromthe bypass tray

(4-3) Adjusting the center line of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original whenpaper is fed from the drawer.

U034U067

(P. 1-6-30)U072

(P. 1-6-52)

Caution:Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenancemode.

Procedure

Center line of printing

Correct image Output example 1

Output example 2

Figure 1-6-26

2A1/2

1-6-15

(4-4) Adjusting the margins for printingMake the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.

U402U403

(P. 1-6-31)U404

(P. 1-6-53)

Caution:Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments inmaintenance mode.

Procedure

Ejection direction(reference)

Printer leading edge margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)

Printer left margin

(2.0+2.0 mm)

Printer right margin(2.0+2.0 mm)

Printer trailing edge margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)

–1.5–1.5

Yes

No

Start







Setting range (initial setting/change in value per step)Printer leading edge margins: 0 – +10 (3/0.5 mm)Printer left/right margin: –5 – +10 (2.5/0.5 mm)Printer trailing edge margin: –5 – +10 (4.5/0.5 mm)Printer trailing edge margin of non-standard sizefrom the drawer: 0 – +400 (214/1 msec)Printer trailing edge margin of non-standard sizefrom the bypass tray: 0 – +400 (200/1 msec)

Select the item to be adjusted using the copy exposure adjustment keys.

Are the margins correct?

Change the setting. Increasing the value using the zoom (+) key makes the margin wider. Decreasing the value using the zoom (–) key makes the margin narrower.


Yes

No


End

Proceed to another mode?

Exp. 1 (lit): Printer leading edge marginExp. 3 (lit): Printer left/right marginsExp. 5 (lit): Printer trailing edge marginExp. 1 (flashing): Printer trailing edge margin of non-standard size fromthe drawer*Exp. 3 (flashing): Printer trailing edge margin of non-standard size fromthe bypass tray*

* Amount of image loss (msec) after the registration switch turns off

Figure 1-6-27

2A1/2

1-6-PB

Start



Yes

Yes

No

No


Exp.1 (lit): DrawerExp.3 (lit): Bypass trayExp.5 (lit): Optional drawer


Press the start key to make a test copy.

Decrease the value using the zoom (–) key.

Setting range: –95 – +95Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 0.32 mm.The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.



Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly (copy

example 1)?

Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy

example 2)?

Increase the value using the zoom (+) key.


End


(4-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paperMake the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded.

Procedure

Original Copyexample 1

Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-28

2A1/2

1-6-17

1-6-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lampReplace the exposure lamp as follows.

Procedure1. Remove the printer cover and right cover and

then the contact glass.

Figure 1-6-29

2. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of themachine.

3. Detach the exposure lamp connector from theinverter PCB.

Figure 1-6-30

Right cover

Contact glass

Mirror 1 frame

Cutout

Inverter PCB Connector

2A1/2

1-6-18

4. Remove the two screws holding the exposurelamp and then the lamp.

5. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all theremoved parts.

Figure 1-6-31

Exposure lamp

2A1/2

1-6-19

(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wiresTake the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.

(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires

Procedure1. Remove the right cover, left cover, rear cover,

upper front cover and contact glass.2. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the

machine.3. Detach the inverter wire from the inverter

PCB.

Figure 1-6-32

4. Remove the screw holding each of the frontand rear wire retainers.

5. Remove the mirror 1 frame from the scannerunit.

Figure 1-6-33

6. Unhook the round terminal of the scannerwire from the scanner tension spring on theright side of the scanner unit.

7. Remove the scanner wire.

Figure 1-6-34

Inverter wire

Wire retainer

Wire retainer

Scanner tension springs

2A1/2

1-6-20

(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires

Caution:When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.Machine front: P/N 2A11208 (gray)Machine rear: P/N 2A11209 (black)

Fitting requires the following tools:Two frame securing tools (P/N 2A168080)

Procedure1. Remove the four screws holding the scanner

motor unit and then the unit.

Figure 1-6-35

2. Remove the screw and the gear.

Figure 1-6-36

3. Remove the each E ring and bushing fromthe front and rear of the scanner wire drumshaft and then remove the scanner wire drumshaft from the scanner unit.

Figure 1-6-37

Scanner motor unit

Gear

Bushing

Bushing

E ring E ring

Scanner wire drum shaft

2A1/2

1-6-21

4. Insert the locating ball on each of the scannerwires into the hole in the respective scannerwire drum and wind the scanner wire twoturns inward and eight turns outward.• Use the gray wire at the machine front and

the black wire at the machine rear.5. Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the

scanner unit.• Make sure that the locating balls point

downward.

Figure 1-6-38

6. Insert the two frame securing tools into thepositioning holes at the front and rear of thescanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame inposition.

Figure 1-6-39

2 turns inward

8 turns outward

Machine front (gray)Machine rear (black)

Locatingball

Locatingball

Scanner wire drum

2 turns inward

8 turns outward

Frame securing tool

Mirror 2 frame

Frame securing tool

2A1/2

1-6-22

7. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above tobelow. .............................................................................................................................................................. 1

8. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit. .............................................................. 2

Figure 1-6-40

9. Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire pulleys at the right of thescanner unit, winding from below to above. .................................................................................................... 3

10. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above tobelow. .............................................................................................................................................................. 4

11. Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the right of the scanner unit. ....... 512. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension springs. .......................................................................... 6

Figure 1-6-41

13. Remove the scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools.14. Gather the scanner wires toward the locating balls.15. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position.16. Refit all the removed parts.

2A1/2

1-6-23

(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unitTake the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be checked or replaced.

Procedure1. Open the front cover and remove the waste

toner tank and toner container.2. Remove the printer cover and right cover.3. Detach the two connector of the operation

unit.

Figure 1-6-42

4. Remove the two screws holding the eject trayand then the tray.

Figure 1-6-43

5. Remove the three screws holding the laserscanner unit.

Figure 1-6-44

Connectors

Eject tray

Laser scanner unit

2A1/2

1-6-24

6. Detach the two connector and remove thelaser scanner unit.• When removing the connector that is

covered with a sponge, remove the spongefirst.

7. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit allthe removed parts.Fit the sponge packing with the new scannerunit.

8. Run the maintenance item U042 to set thetype of LSU. See the label on the LSU.

Figure 1-6-45

Connectors

Sponge

2A1/2

1-6-25

(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be checked or replaced.

Procedure1. Remove the printer cover, right cover and

contact glass.2. Remove the rear cover and the shield cover.3. Detaach connectors CN16 and CN17 on the

main PCB.

Figure 1-6-46

4. Remove the ISU cable plate.5. Remove the four screws holding the ISU

cover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-47

6. Remove the four screws holding the ISU andthen the ISU.

7. Replace the ISU and refit all the removedparts.

8. Run maintenance items U065, U066 andU067 to adjust the copy image.

Figure 1-6-48

CN16CN17

ISU cable plate

ISU cover

ISU

2A1/2

1-6-26

(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness not obtained).

Caution:• Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (page 1-6-16) first. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image,

and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.• Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for

the adjustment.

Procedure

Yes

No

Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification.

Start

Remove the contact glass. Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame.For copy example 1, move the frame in the direction of the white arrow ( ).For copy example 2, move the frame in the direction of the black arrow ( ).

End


Place the original on the contact glass.

Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass.

Mirror 2 frame

Screws

Figure 1-6-50


Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-49

2A1/2

1-6-27

(6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning directionPerform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.

U067(P. 1-6-30)

U053(P. 1-4-10)

U065 (main scanning

direction)

U065 (auxiliary scanning

direction) (P. 1-6-28)

Caution:Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.Also, perform “(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction” (page 1-6-28) and “(9)Adjusting the scanner center line” (page 1-6-30) after this adjustment.

Procedure

Original Copyexample

Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-51



Yes

No

Start

End


Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.


Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image wider, and decreasing it makes the image narrower.

For copy example 1, increase the value using the zoom (+) key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the zoom (–) key.



Select “Exp. 1” (main scanning direction) using the copy exposure

adjustment keys.



2A1/2

1-6-28



Yes

No

Start




Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image longer, and decreasing it make the image shorter.





Select “Exp. 3” (auxiliary scanning direction) using the copy exposure

adjustment keys.

End


(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning directionPerform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.

U053(P. 1-4-10)

U070(P. 1-6-49)

U065 (auxiliary scanning

direction)

U065 (main scanning

direction) (P. 1-6-27)

Caution:Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

Procedure

Original Copyexample 1

Copyexample 2

Figure 1-6-52

2A1/2

1-6-29

(8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registrationPerform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.

U034(P. 1-6-12)

U071(P. 1-6-50)

U066


Procedure

Is the scanner leading edge registration

correct?

Yes

No

Start










Setting range : –15 – +15Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.17 mm.

End


Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-53

2A1/2

1-6-30

(9) Adjusting the scanner center linePerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.

U034(P. 1-6-14)

U072(P. 1-6-52)

U067


Procedure

Yes

No

Start






Is the scanner center line correct?


The new settingis stored.

Setting range: –39.0 – +39.0Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.17 mm.



End


Copy example 2

Scanner center line

Figure 1-6-54

2A1/2

1-6-31

(10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glassPerform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.

U402(P. 1-6-15)

U404(P. 1-6-53)

U403


Procedure

Scanner leading edge margin (3 ± 2.5 mm)

Scannerleft margin

(3 ± 2.5 mm)

Scanner right margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)


Scanner trailing edge margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)

Change the setting.Increasing the value using the zoom (+) key makes the margin wider.Decreasing the value using the zoom (–) key makes the margin narrower.Yes

No

Start




Exp. 1(lit): Scanner left marginExp. 3(lit): Scanner leading edgemarginExp. 5(lit): Scanner right marginExp. 1(flashing): Scanner trailing edge margin




Setting range (initial setting/change in value per step)Scanner left margin: 0 – +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)Scanner leading edge margin: 0 – +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)Scanner right margin: 0 – +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 – +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)




Yes

No


End


Figure 1-6-55

2A1/2

1-6-32

1-6-4 Image formation section

(1) Detaching and refitting the image formation unitFollow the procedure below to replace or check the image formation unit.

Prucedure1. Pull the drawer out and open the front cover,

bypass tray and paper conveying unit.2. Remove the waste toner tank and toner

container.3. Remove the two screws holding the waste

toner tank cover and then the cover.4. Remove the screw holding the developing

retainer and then the retainer.

Figure 1-6-56

5. Remove the two screws and datach theconnector and remove the image formationunit.

Figure 1-6-57

Waste toner tank

Developing retainer

Image formation unitConnector

2A1/2

1-6-33

(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unitFollow the procedure below to replace the charger assembly.

Prucedure1. Remove the image formation unit (see page

1-6-32).2. Remove the screw holding the main charger

assemby and then the assembly.3. Replace the main charger unit and refit all the

removed parts.• When fitting the main charger unit, hold it

down and fit it close to the cleaning unit.

Figure 1-6-58

Main charger unit

2A1/2

1-6-34

(3) Detaching and refitting the drumFollow the procedure below to replace the drum.

Cautions:• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and fitting the drum.• When removing the drum, spread paper underneath as there is a possibility of toner spill. Toner spill can be reduced byinserting an approximately 20-mm thick pad under the image formation unit toward the developing section and removingthe drum with the unit slightly tilted.• Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.• After removing the drum, keep it in the drum case or storage bag to protect the surface from light.


1-6-32).2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-6-

33).3. Remove the four screw and blade spring, and

then open the cleaning unit.• Slide the cleaning blade back and forth and

insert an approximately 4 to 4.5-mm thickspacer between the retainer at the rear ofthe cleaning unit and the housing.

Figure 1-6-59

4. Remove the screw holding the drumgrounding plate and then the plate.

5. Remove the E ring from the drum shaft.

Figure 1-6-60

Cleaning unit

Blade springSpacer

Drum grounding plate

E ring

2A1/2

1-6-35

6. Remove the screw holding the upperdeveloping seal and then the seal.

Figure 1-6-61

7. Pull the drum shaft out and remove the drum.• Detach the drum horizontally.

8. Replace the drum and refit all the removedparts.• When replacing the drum, insert a sheet of

paper between the drum and developingroller to prevent damage to the drum.

• Check the letter indicating the drum typeprinted on the new drum flange.

• Securely insert the drum shaft as far as itwill go. When turning the drum shaft, turn itin the direction indicated by the arrowmarked on the image formation unit frame.

• Rotate the drum in its rotational directionand check that the cleaning blade does notflip up.

9. After replacing the drum, run maintenanceitems below.• U109 “Setting the drum type “ (set to the

drum type printed on the new drum flange)• U110 “Checking/clearing the drum

count”(clear the drum count)• U111 “Checking/clearing the drum drive

time” (clear the value)

Figure 1-6-62

Upper developing seal

Drum

Drum shaft

2A1/2

1-6-36

(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning bladeFollow the procedure below to replace the cleaning blade.


1-6-32).2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-6-

33).3. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-34).4. Remove the two screws and remove the

cleaning blade.

Figure 1-6-63

5. Replace the cleaning blade and refit all theremoved parts.• Apply toner or white powder to the edge of

the new cleaning blade.• After fitting the cleaning blade, slide it to the

right and left once and check that the rightand left edges of the blade do not ride overor enter under the seal.

• Rotate the drum shaft in the direction of thearrow marked on the image formation unitframe and check that the cleaning bladedoes not flip up.

Figure 1-6-64

Cleaning blade

Cleaning blade

2A1/2

1-6-37

(5) Replace the developerFollow the procedure below to replace the developer.


1-6-32).2. Remove the screw and washer. While lifting

the hooks upward, slide the developingsection cover until removed.

3. Replace the developer and refit all theremoved parts.• When disposing of the developer, tilt the

image formation unit in the direction of Ashown in the diagram and rotate thedeveloping spiral gear.

• Never turn the magnet roller when the drumis installed.

• When refitting the developing section cover,make sure that the cover and the threehooks of the housing engage securely.

4. Run the maintenance item U130 to set theinitial setting for the developer.

Figure 1-6-65

Hook

Hook

Hook

Developing section cover

A

2A1/2

1-6-38

1-6-5 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assemblyFollow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller assembly.

Procedure1. Open the bypass tray and paper conveying

unit.2. Remove the transfer roller assembly.

Caution: Remove the transfer roller assemblycarefully to prevent the residual toner in thetransfer roller assembly from spilling.

3. Replace the transfer roller assembly and refitall the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-66

Transfer roller assembly

2A1/2

1-6-39

1-6-6 Fixing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unitFollow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit.

Procedure1. Open the paper conveying unit and remove

the left cover.2. Remove the two screws and detach the three

connector and then remove the fixing unit.

Figure 1-6-67

(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistorFollow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit thermistor.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit.2. Remove the screw and then remove the

fixing unit thermistor.3. Replace the fixing unit thermistor and refit all

the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-68

Fixing unit Connector

Connectors

Fixing unit thermistor

2A1/2

1-6-40

(3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heaterFollow the procedure below to replace the fixing heater.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-39).2. Remove the screw holding the fixing unit front

cover and then the cover.

Figure 1-6-69

3. Remove the two screws and detach the fixingheater wire from the fixing thrmostat.

Figure 1-6-70

4. Remove the screw holding the fixing heaterfront retainer and then the retainer.

Figure 1-6-71

Fixing unit front cover

Fixing heater wire

Fixing heater wire

Nuts

Fixing heater front retainer

2A1/2

1-6-41

5. Pull out the fixing heater from the fixing unit.6. Replace the fixing heater and refit all the

removed parts.• Do not touch the glass surfaces of the fixing

heater with bare hands.

Figure 1-6-72

Fixing heater

2A1/2

1-6-42

(4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation clawsFollow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-39).2. Remove the fixing heater (see page 1-6-40).3. Remove the screw holding the fixing heater

rear retainer and then the retainer.

Figure 1-6-73

4. Remove the gear.5. Remove the two screws and detach the

upper fixing unit.

Figure 1-6-74

6. Remove the springs from the heat rollerseparation claws and then the claws.

7. Replace the heat roller separation claws andrefit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-75

Fixing heater rear retainer

Heat roller separation claws

Springs

Upper fixing unit

Gear

Nut

Nut

2A1/2

1-6-43

(5) Detaching and refitting the heat rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-39).2. Remove the four heat roller separation claws

(see page 1-6-42).3. Remove the two C rings, gear and two

bushings and then remove the heat roller.4. Replace the heat roller and refit all the

removed parts.

Figure 1-6-76

(6) Detaching and refitting the press rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the press roller.

Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-39).2. Remove the upper fixing unit (see page 1-6-

42).3. Remove the two screws holding the fixing

guide plate and then the plate.

Figure 1-6-77

C ring

C ring

Bushing

Gear

Heat roller

Bushing

Fixing guide plate

2A1/2

1-6-44

4. Move the fixing pressure release lever to thethe release position (in the direction of 1).

5. While holding the fixing pressure releaselevers outward, push the fixing pressurerelease levers further.

Figure 1-6-78

6. Remove each of two bearings and fixingpressure release levers and then remove thepress roller.

7. Replace the press roller and refit all theremoved parts.

Figure 1-6-79

Fixing pressurerelease lever

Fixing pressurerelease lever

Press roller

Fixing pressure release lever

Fixing pressure release lever

Bearing

Bearing

2A1/2

1-6-45

1-6-7 DF section

(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF feed pulley (18 cpm copier only)Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley or DF feed pulley.

Procedure1. Remove the two screws holding the DF lower

left cover and theb the cover.

Figure 1-6-80

2. Remove the stop ring, then remove the DForiginal switchback cover.

Figure 1-6-81

• Detaching the DF forwarding pulley3. Remove the two stop rings, then remove the

DF forwarding pulley assembly.4. Remove the DF forwarding pulley, and clean

or check the pulley.

Figure 1-6-82

DF lower left cover

DF original switchback cover

Stop ring

Stop rings

DF forwarding pulley

2A1/2

1-6-46

• Detaching the DF feed pulley5. Remove the stop ring and bushing and pull

the DF feed shaft unit out.

Figure 1-6-83

6. Remove the stop ring, and then remove theDF feed pulley. Clean or check the pulley.

7. Refit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-84

Bushing

Stop ring

DF feed shaft unit

DF feed pulley

Stop ring

2A1/2

1-6-47

(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley (18 cpm copier only)Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF separation pulley.

Procedure1. Remove the DF original switchback cover

(see page 1-6-45).2. Remove the screw holding the original feed

guide and then the guide.• To remove the original feed guide, pull it and

then lift it upward.

Figure 1-6-85

3. Remove the DF separation pulley assembly.4. Remove the stop ring, then remove the DF

separation pulley. Clean or replace the pulley.5. Refit all the removed parts.

Figure 1-6-86

Original feed guide

DF separation pulley

Stop ring

2A1/2

1-6-48

(3) Adjusting the DF lateral squarenessPerform the following adjustment if the copy image is laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained) when the DF isused.

Procedure

Open the DF, loosen the screw and adjust the position of the DF.• For copy example 1, move the

DF in the direction of the black arrow ( ).

• For copy example 2, move the DF in the direction of the white arrow ( ).Yes

No

End


Start

Place an original on the DFand make a test copy.

Retighten the screw andclose the DF.


Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-87

Figure 1-6-88

Screw

2A1/2

1-6-49

(4) Adjusting the DF magnificationAdjust magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction if magnification is incorrect when the DF is used.

U053(P. 1-4-10)

U070U065(P. 1-6-28)


Procedure

Auxiliary scanning direction

Original

Main scanning direction

Copy example 1

Copy example 2


Place an original on the DF and make a test copy.

Yes

No

Start

End

Press the stop/reset keyto exit maintenance mode.




Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increase the value makesthe image longer, and decreasing itmake the image shorter.

Change the setting.• For copy example 1, increase

the value using the zoom (+) key to make the copy image longer.

• For copy example 2, decrease the value using the zoom (-) keys to make the copy image shorter.




Figure 1-6-89

2A1/2

1-6-50

(5) Adjusting the DF leading edge registrationPerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the original and the copy image.

U034(P. 1-6-12)

U066(P. 1-6-29)

U071


Procedure




Yes

No

Start

End

• For copy example 1, increase the value using the zoom (+) key.

• For copy example 2, decrease the value using the zoom (-) key.





Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the copy image by 0.254 mm (15 cpm)/0.295 mm (18 cpm).



Select “Exp. 1” (DF leading edge registration) using the copyexposure adjustment keys.


Copy example 2

Figure 1-6-90

2A1/2

1-6-51

Figure 1-6-91


Press the start key


Yes

No

Start

End

• For copy example 1, increase the value using the zoom (+) key.



Press the stop/reset key to exit maintenance mode..



Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the copy image by 0.254 mm (15 cpm)/0.295 mm (18 cpm).



Select “Exp. 3” (DF trailing edgeregistration) using the copyexposure adjustment keys.


Copy example 2

(6) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registrationPerform the following adjustment if the original scanning end position is not correct when the DF is used.

Caution:If the copy image looks like copy example 2, clean the DF original scanning section.

Procedure

2A1/2

1-6-52

(7) Adjusting the DF center linePerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image.

U034(P. 1-6-14)

U067(P. 1-6-30)

U072


Procedure


Copy example 2

Reference



Yes

No

Start

End

Change the setting.• For copy example 1, increase

the value using the zoom (+) key.




Enter “072” using the copy exposure adjustment keys or zoom +/- keys





Setting range: –39.0 – +39.0Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.17 mm.

Figure 1-6-92

2A1/2

1-6-53

(8) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DFPerform the following adjustment if margins are not correct.

U402(P. 1-6-15)

U404U403

(P. 1-6-31)


Procedure

Figure 1-6-93

DF leading edge margin (3 ± 2.5 mm)

DF left margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)

DF right margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)


DF trailing edge margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)

Change the setting.• Increasing the value using the

zoom (+) key makes the margin wider.

• Decreasing the value using the zoom (-) key makes the margin narrower.

Yes

No

Start




Exp. 1 (lit): DF left marginExp. 3 (lit): DF leading edge marginExp. 5 (lit): DF right marginExp. 1 (flashing): DF trailing edge margin

Place an original on the DF and press the start key to make a test copy.



Setting range (initial setting/change in value per step)DF left margin: 0 – +10 (2.0/0.1 mm)DF leading edge margin: 0 – +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)DF right margin: 0 – +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)DF trailing edge margin: 0 – +10 (3.0/0.1 mm)




Yes

No



End

2A1/2-1

1-7-1

Figure 1-7-1

Figure 1-7-2

1-7-1 Replacing the main PCB

Main PCB replacement requires the following tools:Memory tool PCB (P/N 2AV68030)NVRAM (P/N NAS09010)

Procedure• Before replacing the main PCB (backing up the machine data)

1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect thepower plug. Remove the right cover.

2. After removing the printer cover, remove the 6screws of machine shield cover. And then,remove the upper shield cover, lower shieldcover and shield cover.

3. If the memory board is installed, remove thememory board.

4. Fit the NVRAM to the memory tool PCB.Caution:After fitting the NVRAM, do not remove it untilthe writing of the machine data completes.

5. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier andconnect its CN1 to CN19 on the main PCB.Note:Insert the memory tool PCB along the upperand lower guides.

Upper shield cover

Lower shield cover

Shield cover

LED2

LED1

CN1

Memory tool PCB

NVRAM

2A1/2

1-7-2

• - • - • -•: On for 0.25 s-: Off for 0.25 s

• - • – • - • –•: On for 0.25 s-: Off for 0.25 s–: Off for 1 s

Off

• - • - • -•: On for 0.25 s-: Off for 0.25 s

Off

8. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.9. Remove the memory tool PCB.

10. Replace the main PCB.

• After replacing the main PCB (writing the machine data)11. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on.12. Upgrade the firmware on the main PCB. See pages 1-7-3.13. Turn the main switch on.14. Enter maintenance mode.15. Run maintenance item U020.16. Run maintenance item U252 and set the destination.17. Run maintenance item U917 and select “WRITE”.18. Exit maintenance mode.19. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.20. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and connect its CN1 to CN19 on the main PCB.

Note:Insert the memory tool PCB along the upper and lower guides.

21. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB flashes (on for 0.5 s → off for0.5 s → on for 0.5 s → off for 0.5 s → on for 1 s → off for 0.5 s) for approximately 10 seconds and the machine data onthe NVRAM will be written to the SRAM on the main PCB.

22. When flashing LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB remains lit, writing of the machine data is complete.If an error occurs while the machine data is being written, LED1 (green) flashes and goes off in the patterns given belowaccording to the nature of the error. Remove the memory tool PCB and perform the respective corrective measures andthen write the machine data again.

6. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB flashes (on for 1 s → off for 1 s)for approximately 10 seconds and the machine data on the SRAM of the main PCB will be backed up on the NVRAM.

7. When flashing LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB remains lit, backing up of machine data is complete.If an error occurs while the machine data is being backed up, LED1 (green) flashes and goes off in the patterns givenbelow according to the nature of the error. Remove the memory tool PCB and perform the respective correctivemeasures and then back up the machine data again.

“WRITE” is selected in maintenanceitem U917.

Since the NVRAM contains datafrom the previous operation, datacannot be written to it.

The machine data was not trans-mitted from the SRAM on the mainPCB to the NVRAM correctly.

Run maintenance item U917 and select “READ”.

Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and backup the machine data again.

Turn the main switch off and on and back up the machinedata again. If the error persists, replace the NVRAM.

LED1 Description Corrective measures

Run maintenance item U917 and select “WRITE”.

Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and thenback up the machine data again.

Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and backup the machine data again.

Turn the main switch off and on and write the machinedata again. If the error persists, replace the main PCB.

“READ” is selected in maintenanceitem U917.

An NVRAM with no backup data isused. (LED1 flashes for 10 s in thepattern on for 1 s and off for 1 s, andthen flashes in the pattern describedon the left.)

The machine data on the NVRAMmay be damaged (checksum error).

The machine data was nottransmitted from the NVRAM to theSRAM on the main PCB correctly(SRAM problem).

LED1 Description Corrective measures

23. Remove the memory tool PCB and refit all the removed parts.

2A1/2

1-7-3

1-7-2 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB

Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:Flash tool assembly (P/N 35968010)Memory tool PCB (P/N 2AV68030)Master ROM: Main ROM IC (P/N 2A168050)

Procedure1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the

power plug.2. Remove the two screws holding the upper

shield cover and then the cover after removedthe printer cover.

3. If the memory board is installed, remove thememory board.

4. Fit the master ROM into the IC3 socket on theflash tool assembly.

5. Connect CN2 on the flash tool PCB to CN2 onthe memory tool PCB.

6. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier andconnect its CN1 to CN19 on the main PCB.Note:Insert the memory tool PCB along the upperand lower guides.

7. Insert the power plug and turn the main switchon. LED2 (green) on the flash tool assemblyflashes and upgrading of the master ROMstarts.

8. When flashing LED2 (green) remains lit afterapproximately 30 to 40 seconds, upgrading ofthe master ROM is complete.

9. Turn the main switch on.10. Remove the memory tool PCB.

Important:“C021” may be indicated on the operationpanel while upgrading the firmware. However,it does not interfere with the upgradingoperation.

Figure 1-7-3

Figure 1-7-4

Upper shield cover

CN1

CN2CN2IC3

LED2

Memory tool PCB

Master ROM

Flash tool assembly

2A1/2

1-7-4

1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)

The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.• High-voltage transformer PCB: VR101, VR102, VR201, VR301• Inverter PCB: VR1

2A1/2

2-1-1

2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections. Primary feed conveys paper fromthe upper drawer, lower drawer or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feedtakes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.Each drawer can hold up to 250 sheets of paper. The bypass tray can hold up to 50 sheets of paper.Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the paper feed pulley. Paper is fed from the bypass tray by the rotation ofthe bypass paper feed pulley.

1 Paper feed pulley2 ST paper feed pulley*3 Bypass paper feed pulley4 Right registration roller5 Left registration roller6 Paper conveying roller*7 Paper conveying pulley*8 Drawer bottom plate9 Paper conveying guide*

0 Bypass lift! Paper feed clutch (PFCL)@ ST paper feed clutch (STPFCL)# Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)$ Regisuration clutch (RCL)% Registration switch (RSW)^ ST feed switch* (STFSW)

*: Optional.

Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section

3

0

#

7

9 2^

6

@ 8

8

1

!

4$5

%

Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed section block diagram

RCLRCL

CN6-6

MPCB

CN3-13

CN6-4

CN6-1

CN5-2

CN5-8

RSWRSW

STFSW* STFSW

BYPPFCL BYPPFCL

PFCLPFCL

STPFCL* STPFCL

*: Optional.

2A1/2

2-1-2

Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the drawer

a: When the drive motor (DM) turns on, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on for 150 ms to start primary paper feed.b: 160 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns

on for 300 ms.c: When the PVSYNC signal from the optical section turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary

paper feed.d: 150 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns

off.

150 ms

160 ms

300 ms

150 ms

Start key

PVSYNC

DM

PFCL

RSW

RCL

a

b c d

150 ms

160 ms

300 ms

150 ms

Start key

PVSYNC

DM

BYPPFCL

RSW

RCL

a

b c d

Timing chart 2-1-2 Paper feed from the bypass tray

a: When the drive motor (DM) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on for 150 ms to start primarypaper feed.

b: 160 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turnson for 300 ms.

c: When the PVSYNC signal from the optical section turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondarypaper feed.

d: 150 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turnsoff.

2A1/2

2-1-3

Timing chart 2-1-3 Paper feed from the optional drawer

a: When the drive motor (DM) turns on, the ST feed motor (STFM) turns on.b: 50 ms after the ST feed motor (STFM) turns on, the ST paper feed clutch (STPFCL) turns on for 150 ms to start

primary paper feed.c: 160 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns

on for 300 ms.d: When the PVSYNC signal from the optical section turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary

paper feed.e: 150 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns

off.

50 ms

150 ms

160 ms

300 ms

150 ms

Start key

PVSYNC

DM

STFM

STPFCL

STFSW

RSW

RCL

a

b

c d e

2A1/2

2-1-4

2-1-2 Main charging section

The main charging section consists of the drum and main charger unit. The drum is electrically charged plus by means ofa grid to form a latent image on the surface. The shield grid ensures that the charge is applied uniformly.

Figure 2-1-4 Main charging section block diagram

Figure 2-1-3 Main charging section

Tungsten wire

Drum

Main charger unit

Shield grid

CN6-1524 V DC

MPCB

CN1-1MC

GRID

Drum

HVTPCB

CN6-13MC REM

CN1-3

CN6-12GRID CONT

CN1-4

CN6-11MC ALM

CN1-5

2A1/2

2-1-5

Timing chart 2-1-4 Main charging

a: When the Video signal is received from the optical section, main charging (MC REM) starts.b: 95 ms after main charging (MC REM) starts, the grid control voltage (GRID CNT) increases in stages.c: 100 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the grid control voltage (GRID CNT)

decreases in stages.d: 95 ms after the grid control voltage (GRID CNT) turns off, main charging (MC REM) completes.

95 ms

95 ms × 4

100 ms

95 ms

95 ms × 4

Start key

Video

DM

MC REM

GRID CNT

ESW

a

b c

d

2A1/2

2-1-6

2-1-3 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frames and the image scanning unit for scanning and the laserscanner unit for printing.

1 Mirror 1 frame2 Exposure lamp (EL)3 Mirror 14 Inveter PCB (INPCB)5 Mirror 2 frame6 Mirror 27 Mirror 38 Image scanning unit (ISU)9 Lens0 CCD PCB (CCDPCB)! DF open/close switch (DFOCSW)@ Scanner motor (SM)# Scanner home position switch (SHPSW)$ Laser scanner unit (LSU)

Figure 2-1-5 Optical section

# @ ! 8 1

4$

3

2 5 6

70 9

2A1/2

2-1-7

(1) Original scanningThe original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the imagescanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side toside. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. When the DF is used, the scanner and mirrorframes stop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning.

Figure 2-1-6 Optional section block diagram

Timing chart 2-1-5 Scanner operation (1)

a: After the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the scanner motor (SM) rotates in reverse, which turns off 400 scannermotor pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on.

b: 35 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, it rotates forward, which turns off 160 scanner motor pulses after thescanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off.

c: Lighting of the exposure lamp is confirmed, the AGC is performed and shading is corrected.d: The scanner motor (SM) rotates in reverse for 412 scanner motor pulses, at the end of which the scanner stops at

the scanning start position for the original on the contact glass.

CN

11-2

CN

12-1

–C

N12

-6C

N1-

1–C

N1-

6

MPCB

INPCB

CN

16-1

–C

N16

-10

CN

17-1

–C

N17

-6

CN

1-1–

CN

1-10

CN

2-1–

CN

2-6

CCDPCBEL

SHPSWC

N15

-10

DFOCSW

Original

CN

15-1

–C

N15

-6

SM

800 P

400 P

35 ms

160 P

800 ms 800 ms412 P

MSW

DFCHSOL

Fwd.rotation

SM

Rev.rotation

EL

SHPSW

a b c d

Lamp-on confirmation, AGC and shading

• When the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) is off at power-on

2A1/2

2-1-8

Timing chart 2-1-6 Scanner operation (2)

a: When the main switch (MSW) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) rotates forward, which turns off 400 scanner motorpulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off.

b: 35 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, it rotates in reverse, which turns off 400 scanner motor pulses after thescanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on.

c: 35 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, it rotates forward, which turns off 160 scanner motor pulses after thescanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns off.

d: Lighting of the exposure lamp is confirmed, the AGC is performed, and shading is corrected.e: The scanner motor (SM) rotates in reverse for 412 scanner motor pulses, at the end of which the scanner stops at

the scanning start position for the original on the contact glass.

400 P

35 ms 35 ms

160 P

400 P

600 P412 P

Lamp-on confirmation, AGC, and shading

MSW

DFCHSOL

Fwd.rotation

SM

Rev.rotation

EL

SHPSW

• When the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) is on at power-on

a b c d e

2A1/2

2-1-9

(2) Image printingThe image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as imageprinting data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms alatent image on the drum surface.

1 Laser diode PCB (LDPCB)2 Laser diode3 Collimator lens4 Cylindrical lens5 Polygon mirror6 Polygon motor (PM)7 fθ lens8 BD sensor mirror9 BD sensor

Figure 2-1-7 Laser scanner unit (1)

1

2 3 9

8

4

7

56

2A1/2

2-1-10

Figure 2-1-8 Laser scanner unit (2)

1 Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum.2 Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam.3 Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.4 Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 25984 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam

toward the drum for one main-direction scan.5 Fθ lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter

constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beamis on the drum surface.

6 BD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal.7 BD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PCB (MPCB) to

provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.

The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-9.Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction isprovided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-10. Electricalcharge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.

Figure 2-1-9 Figure 2-1-10

67

1

2

35

4

Drum

Main scanning direction

Auxilary scanning direction

:laser beam is on75+20 µ m-10

80+25 µ m–15

2A1/2

2-1-11

2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container.The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and thedeveloping spirals that agitate the developer.

Figure 2-1-11 Developing section

Figure 2-1-12 Flow of the toner

Toner container

Developing unit Toner feed motor (TFM)

Flow of the toner

Right developing spiral

From the toner container

Left developing spiral

Waste toner tank

Cleaning spiral

2A1/2

2-1-12

(1) Formation of magnetic brushThe developing roller consists of a magnet roller with five poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller aroundthe magnet roller entrains developer, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height ofthe magnetic brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on themagnet roller and the position of the doctor blade.A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing rollerto provide image contrast.

1 Developing unit housing2 Developing roller3 Toner sensor (TNS)4 Doctor blade5 Right developing spiral6 Left developing spiral7 Developing paddle

Figure 2-1-14 Developing section block diagram

Figure 2-1-13 Forming a magnetic brush

A

A: Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller: 0.6–0.05 mm+0.1

4

76 5

3

1

2

N1

N1: 900 × 10-4 ± 50 × 10-4 TN2: 640 × 10-4 ± 50 × 10-4 TS1: 590 × 10-4 ± 50 × 10-4 TS2: 485 × 10-4 ± 50 × 10-4 TS3: 605 × 10-4 ± 50 × 10-4 T

92°

69.3°

60°

68.2°

S2S3

N2

S1

CN6-1524 V DC

MPCB

CN1-1

DB

HVTPCB

CN6-10DB REM

CN1-6

CN6-9

CN2-2

CN2-4

CN2-6, 7

DB CONT

TNS SIG

Developing roller

TNS CONT

CN1-7

TFM

2A1/2

2-1-13

(2) Toner density detection by the toner sensorThe toner sensor (TNS) detects the toner density. As the developer passes by the sensor section of the toner sensor, thetoner sensor detects the ratio of toner to carrier in the developer and converts it into a voltage. When more toner is used,the ratio of toner to carrier decreases and the toner sensor output voltage increases. When the ratio drops below thespecified value, the increase in toner sensor output voltage triggers toner replenishing. When toner is added and the ratioof toner to carrier returns to normal, the toner sensor output voltage drops to the point where toner replenishing stops.

(3) Toner density control

Figure 2-1-15 Toner density control

a: If the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner feed start level 15 s after the drive motor (DM) has turned on(end of toner empty detection inhibit time), the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.

b: As toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the toner feed stop level andreplenishing stops.

c: When the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner empty detection level after toner replenishing is carried out,the toner being replenished message appears disabling copying and forced toner feed starts. If the toner sensoroutput voltage fails to fall to the toner feed stop level within 180 s of the start of forced toner feed, the toner requestmessage appears.

d: When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the toner feed stop level andreplenishing stops. After 60 s aging (15 s while copying) the toner being replenished message disappears andcopying is enabled.

e: After replacing the toner container and the waste toner tank, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.f: When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops to the toner feed stop level. The toner

being replenished message disappears and replenishing stops.

Toner sensor output voltage (V)

Toner emptydetection level (3.2V)

Toner feed start level (2.2V)

Copying

Toner being replenished message(forced toner feed)

Toner request message(Toner container and waste toner tank to be replaced.)

180 s

ab c d e f

2A1/2

2-1-14

(4) Correcting the toner sensor control voltageThe toner sensor control voltage is corrected based on the absolute humidity and the total drive motor time so that thetoner density is kept constant regardless of the changes in humidity and the total drive motor time.Toner sensor control voltage after correction = A + B + CA: Toner sensor control voltage before correction (value set by maintenance item U131)B: Correction data based on the absolute humidityC: Correction data based on the total drive motor time

• Correction based on the absolute humidity

Figure 2-1-17 Absolute humidity computation block diagram

Figure 2-1-16 Correction based on the absolute humidity

a: When the absolute humidity is between 0 and 12 g/m3, the correction data becomes a constant value of –5, whichdecreases the toner sensor control voltage.

b: When the absolute humidity is between 12 and 91 g/m3, the correction data is increased according to the rise inabsolute humidity.

c: When the absolute humidity is 91 g/m3, the correction data becomes 0.d: When the absolute humidity is between 91 and 321 g/m3, the correction data is increased according to the rise in

absolute humidity, which increases the toner sensor control voltage.e: When the absolute humidity exceeds 321 g/m3, the correction data becomes a constant value of +8, which increases

the toner sensor control voltage.

Computing the absolute humidityThe humidity sensor (HUMSENS) converts the relative humidity detected by the humidity sensing element into a voltageand sends it to the main PCB (MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) computes the absolute humidity based on this HUMSENSsignal and the temperature (ETTH signal) detected by the external temperature thermistor (ETTH).

MPCB

HUMSENS

2 HUMSENS

1 5 V DC

CN9-1

CN9-2

CN9-3

CN9-4

4

3

ETTHETTH

HUMSPCB

GNDHumidity sensing element

+8

Correction data

12 91 321 Absolute humidity (g/m3)

0

0

-5

a

c

e

b

d

2A1/2

2-1-15

• Correction based on the total drive motor timeThe toner sensor control voltage is also corrected based on the total time the drive motor (DM) has been on fromexecution of maintenance item U130, so that the toner sensor output voltage is regulated properly.

Figure 2-1-18 Correction based on the total drive motor time

a: When maintenance item U130 is run for initial developer setting, the total drive motor time is cleared and the tonersensor control voltage correction data becomes 0.

b: When the total drive motor time is between 300 and 500 min., the correction data is decreased according to theincrease in the total drive motor time.

c: When the total drive motor time is between 500 and 800 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with aconstant value of –5.

d: When the total drive motor time is between 800 and 1200 min., the correction data is decreased according to theincrease in the total drive motor time.

e: When the total drive motor time is between 1200 and 2000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with aconstant value of –10.

f: When the total drive motor time is between 2000 and 3000 min., the correction data is decreased according to theincrease in the total drive motor time.

g: When the total drive motor time is between 3000 and 6000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with aconstant value of –15.

h: When the total drive motor time is between 6000 and 7000 min., the correction data is decreased according to theincrease in the total drive motor time.

i: When the total drive motor time exceeds 7000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a constantvalue of –30.

(5) Correcting toner sensor output voltageThe toner sensor output voltage is corrected according to the absolute humidity at power-on (the main switch turning on),fixing temperature and accumulated drive time.Toner sensor output voltage after correction = Toner sensor output voltage before correction – Correction data at power-onCorrection data at power-on = A – BIf A – B ≤ 0, the correction data at power-on is 0A: Correction data based on the absolute humidity and fixing temperatureB: Accumulated drive time from the main switch turning on (total drive motor on-time)

If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50°C/122°F or below, correction data A is determined as follows:

Correction data A

+15

+50

The absolute humidity at the last main switch turning off was 50 g/m3 or below and the absolute humidity at the main switch turning on was 50 g/m3 or below.Cases other than above.

Condition

If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50°C/122°F or above, the value of correction data A appliedwhen the main switch was last turned off is used.

300 500 800 1200 2000 3000 6000 7000Drive time (min.)

X: Toner sensor control voltage for initial developer setting (the value set in U131 in bits)

Correction data

X-5

0

X-10

X-15

X-30

ab

cd

ef

gh

i

2A1/2

2-1-16

2-1-5 Transfer and separation section

The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller and drum separation claws.A high voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfercharging minus. Toner adhered to the transfer roller is removed by the transfer cleaner.

Figure 2-1-20 Transfer and separation section block diagram

Figure 2-1-19 Transfer and separation section

CN6-1524 V DC

MPCB

CN1-1

TC

Drum

Transfer roller

HVTPCB

CN6-8TC REM

CN1-8

CN6-7TC CONT

CN1-9

Drum separation claws

Drum

Transfer roller

Transfer cleaner

2A1/2

2-1-17

Timing chart 2-1-7 Operation of transfer

a: 215 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed, transfer charging (TC REM) starts.b: 550 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, transfer charging (TC REM) ends.

150 ms

550 ms215 ms

Start key

RSW

RCL

TC REM

TC CNT

a b

2A1/2

2-1-18

2-1-6 Cleaning section

The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transferprocess, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner tank.The cleaning blade is equipped with a thrust mechanism to protect the blade and drum from scratches.

Figure 2-1-21 Cleaning section

Cleaning spiral

Drum

Cleaning blade

2A1/2

2-1-19

2-1-7 Charge erasing section

The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface.

Figure 2-1-23 Charge erasing section block diagram

Figure 2-1-22 Charge erasing section

Drum

Cleaning lamp (CL)

CN3-6CL REM

MPCB

Drum

CL

2A1/2

2-1-20

2-1-8 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2-1-25. When paper reaches the fixing section after the transferprocess, it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by the fixing heater (FH). Pressure is appliedby the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper.When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by heat roller separation claws and isejected from the fixing section by the rotation of the eject pulley and roller.

1 Upper fixing housing2 Lower fixing housing3 Fixing guide4 Heat roller5 Press roller6 Heat roller separation claw7 Fixing heater (FH)8 Fixing unit thermostat (FTS)9 Fixing unit thermistor (FTH)0 Eject switch (ESW)! Feedshift guide@ Eject roller# Eject pulley

Figure 2-1-25 Fixing section block diagram

Figure 2-1-24 Fixing section

CN

1-9

CN

1-9

FH

RE

M

FT

H

5 V

DC

MPCB

PSPCB

TB3

TB4

CN

11-7

CN

11-5

CN

11-8

ES

W

FTSHeat roller

FH

FT

H

ES

W

#

@

08

1

74

3

2

5

! 6 9

2A1/2

2-1-21

Timing chart 2-1-8 Operation of fixing section

a: When the fixing temperature reaches 125°C/257°F after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the copier entersprimary stabilization. The developing bias (DB REM) turns on and the cooling fan motor (CFM) rotates at half speed.

b: 70 ms after the primary stabilization starts, the drive motor (DM) turns on.c: When the fixing temperature reaches 180°C/356°F, the copier enters secondary stabilization and the drive motor

(DM) turns off 20 s later.d: 100 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns off, the developing bias (DB REM) turns off.

• Fixing control temperature correctionDuring copying, the fixing control temperature is corrected based on the size of paper used and ambient temperature.

A4R/81/2" × 11"R

10°C/50°FSize of paper

Ambient temperature

B5

A5R/51/2" × 81/2"R

185°C/365°F

175°C/347°F

165°C/329°F

20°C/68°F

180°C/356°F

170°C/338°F

160°C/320°F

30°C/86°F

175°C/347°F

165°C/329°F

155°C/311°F

MSW

DM

DB REM

CFM

70 ms 20 s

100 ms

a

b c

d

Half speed

Primary stabilization fixing temperature 125°C/257°F

Fixing temperature

Secondary stabilizationfixing temperature180°C/356°F

2A1/2

2-1-22

2-1-9 DF section

(1) SDF (15 cpm copier)The DF consists of the components shown in Figure. It conveys the original across the DF contact glass insynchronization with the copier scanning operation.When an original is placed on the original table and the DF original detection switch turns on, the scanner motor (SM)turns on to drive the DF to feed the original.When the DF change solenoid (DFCHSOL) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) drive to the scanner is interrupted and thescanner scans the original from the DF at a fixed position.The scanned original is ejected onto the original holder by the DF eject roller and DF eject pulley.

Figure 2-1-26 SDF

Figure 2-1-27 SDF block diagram

1 8 596

2! 0

3

4

7

1 DF original conveying roller2 DF original conveying pulley3 DF eject roller4 DF eject pulley5 Original table6 Original scanning guide7 Original holder8 DF original detection switch (DFODSW)9 DF timing switch (DFTSW)0 DF change solenoid (DFCHSOL)! DF contact glass

MPCB

DFTSW

CN

11-1

0

CN

11-1

3

DFODSW

2A1/2

2-1-23

(2) ADF (18 cpm copier)The DF consists of the components shown in Figure. It conveys the original across the DF contact glass insynchronization with the copier scanning operation.During primary original feed, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on and the DF forwarding pulley and DF originalconveying roller feed originals one by one. Each original is then conveyed to the upper and lower registration rollers bythe DF original feed pulley and DF separation pulley.During secondary original feed, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on and the upper and lower registration rollersconvey the original onto the DF contact glass. The DF upper eject roller and DF lower eject roller then eject the originalto the original eject cover.

Figure 2-1-28 ADF

Figure 2-1-29 ADF block diagram

1 DF forwarding pulley2 DF original feed pulley3 DF separation pulley4 DF original conveying roller5 DF upper registration roller6 DF lower registration roller7 DF upper eject roller8 DF lower eject roller9 Original table

1 0^ 9742!

&

5

@

6 * 3 # % 8 $

0 Lift guide! Original feed guide@ Original conveying guide# Original scanning guide$ Upper eject guide% Lower eject guide^ DF original detection switch (DFODSW)& DF timing switch (DFTSW)* DF contact glass

MPCB

DFTSW

CN

11-1

0

CN

11-1

3

CN

14-1

–C

N14

-6

OFM DFODSW

2A1/2

2-1-24

Timing chart 2-1-9 Operation of ADF

a: Simultaneous to when the start key is turned on, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on to start primary original feed.b: 170 ms after the leading edge of the original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) on, the original feed motor (OFM)

turns off.c: 300 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the scanner motor (SM) turns on for 200 ms.d: 100 ms after the scanner motor (SM) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on to start secondary original

feed.e: 2000 ms after the trailing edge of the original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) off, the original feed motor (OFM)

turns off.f: 3000 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the scanner motor (SM) turns on for 1700 ms.

170 ms

300 ms

200 ms

100 ms

2000 ms

1700 ms

3000 ms

Start key

OFM

DFTSW

SM

a b

c

f

d e

2A1/2

2-2-1

Machine front Machine inside Machine rear

3

2

6

91

7

8

10

5

4

Figure 2-2-1 PCBs

1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical components and optional devices.2. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates 24 V DC, 12 V DC and 5 V DC; controls the fixing heater.3. High-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) ... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for

transfer.4. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.5. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals.6. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) ........................ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.7. Laser diode PCB (LDPCB) .......................... Generates and controls the laser light.8. Humidity sensor PCB (HUMSPCB) ............. Detects absolute humidity.9. Memory PCB* (MEMPCB) ........................... Reads and outputs the image.

10. ST drive motor PCB** (STDMPCB) ............. Controls the drawer drive motor in the optional drawer.

*: Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 18 cpm copier.**: Optional.

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

(1) PCBs

2A1/2

2-2-2

3

2

5

9

1

7

8

910

10

• SDF (15 cpm)

11

12

13

1415

16

6

4


(2) Switches and sensors

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1. Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.2. Safety switch (SSW) .................................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover or paper conveying cover

is opened; resets paper jam detection.3. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing and detects the presence

of paper in the drawer.4. Eject switch (ESW) ...................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.5. Drawer detection switch (DDSW) ................ Detects the insertion of the drawer.6. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) .... Detects the scanner in the home position.7. DF open/close switch (DFOCSW) ............... Detects the opening and closing of the DF.8. DF safety switch* (DFSSW) ......................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF original switchback cover is

opened; resets original jam detection.9. DF original detection switch (DFODSW) ..... Detects the presence of original on the DF.

10. DF timing switch (DFTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.11. Toner sensor (TNS) ..................................... Detects the toner density in the developing section.12. Humidity sensor (HUMSENS) ...................... Detects absolute humidity.13. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.14. ST safety switch** (STSSW) ........................ Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover of the optional drawer is

opened.15. ST feed switch** (STFSW) ........................... Detects a paper misfeed and the presence of paper in the optional

drawer.16. ST drawer detection switch** (STDDSW) .... Detects the insertion of the optional drawer.

*: For the 18 cpm copier only.**: Optional.

2A1/2

2-2-3

1

2

6

4

5

7

3


(3) Motors

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine.2. Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the optical system.3. Toner feed motor (TFM) ............................... Replenishes toner.4. Cooling fan motor (CFM) ............................. Cools the machine interior.5. Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror.6. Original feed motor* (OFM) ......................... Drives the DF.7. ST feed motor** (STFM) .............................. Drives the paper feed system in the optional drawer.


2A1/2

2-2-4

Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components

1. Paper feed clutch (PFCL) ............................ Primary paper feed from the drawer.2. Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) ......... Primary paper feed from the bypass tray.3. Registration clutch (RCL) ............................. Secondary paper feed.4. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.5. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.6. Fixing heater (FH) ........................................ Heats the heat roller.7. Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) ........................ Prevents overheating in the fixing section.8. DF change solenoid* (DFCHSOL) ............... Switches the scanner drive when the DF is used.9. ST paper feed clutch** (STPFCL) ................ Primary paper feed from the optional drawer.


84

67

5

2

31

9


(4) Other electrical components

2A1/2

2-3-1

2-3-1 Power source PCB

Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram

The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC, 5.1 V DC and 12V DC. It includes a noise filter circuit, a rectifier circuit, a switching regulator circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5 V DC outputcircuit, a 12 V DC output circuit, a fixing heater control circuit and a zero-cross detection circuit.The noise filter circuit consists mainly of a line filter and capacitors. It reduces external noise from the AC input and preventsswitching noise generated by the power source PCB from leaving the machine.The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input that has passed through the noise filter circuit using the diode bridge D1.The smoothing capacitor C14 smoothes out the pulsed current from the diode bridge.The switching control circuit turns on/off the power MOSFET Q1 with the voltage induced in the controlling coil of thetransformer T1 to switch the current induced in the primary coil of the transformer T1.The 24 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diode D6 andsmoothing capacitors C22 and C24, and outputs a stable 24 V DC by the function of the shunt regulator IC1. The outputstatus of the 24 V DC is fed back to the switching control circuit via the photo-coupler PC2. Based on the feedback, theswitching control circuit changes the duty cycle of the pulse that turns power MOSFET Q1 on/off in order to adjust the 24 VDC.The 5.1 V DC output circuit consists of a step-down chopper circuit that uses IC4 as the control IC. It outputs a stable 5.1 VDC.The 12 V DC output circuit converts the 24 V DC from the 24 V DC output circuit to a stable 12 V DC by means of the 4-pinregulator IC2.The zero-cross detection circuit determines the timing at which the fixing heater turns on and sends zero-cross signals tothe main PCB (MPCB).The fixing heater control circuit is controlled by the fixing heater on signal from the main PCB (MPCB). The phototriac PT1turns on when the fixing heater on signal goes low. When the phototriac PT1 is turned on, current flows through the triacTR1 to turn the fixing heaters on.

+

PC1

PC2

C22, 24

C33

C30

24 V DC

GND

12 V DC

GND5.1 V DC

GND

Heater REM

+

PT1

TR1

D6

Heater Common

5.1 V DC

5.1 V DC

Q1

C31

C14

D1

Power source PCB

T1

Heater Live

Mainswitch Noise

filter circuit

AC input

Rectifiercircuit

Zero-cross detection circuit

Switching regulator

circuit

Fixing heater control circuit

Relay

24 V DC output circuit IC1

Overvoltage detection circuit

12 V DC output circuit

IC2

5.1 V DC output circuit

IC3

Zero-cross signal

2A1/2

2-3-2

Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram

C86

C87

C82

LUG1

C6

L3 C11 C83

C9

CN

3J0

505

C7

SF24VSF24VCOIL24COIL GGD

80

TB

4H

-CO

M

H-L

IVE

TB

3 C3

J1502A

J1503A

J250

3A

J100

4A

J1504A

L2

C4

F3

AC

125V

5

AA

C25

0VT

3.15

AL

R2C2

L1

C12 R6 F2R5

TB

2

R1

Z1

C81

TB

1

LIV

E

LUG

3

J050

6

C85

C80

NP

L

F1AC250V T6.3ALAC250V 15A

RY

2A12

805

2A12

806

D81

J250

2A

R15

R19

C14

R14

R16

R7

J1501

J2002

TH

1C

8R

17C

88

14

D1

C16

Q1

T1

121

L80C15

Q2

R8R9

L81C20C19

R10

BE

HS

3

L6

R13

C27

C17

PC

2

3

R22

IC1

KR

1

R23

R24

R

20

R21

C18

R12

R11D5

C31

C26

C24

L4

R18

CN2

D63

1

FB1

C21

G SF

24S

F24

NC

24V

1

CN1

R32

C28

10

J2001J1001A

J2009

J1002A

J1002

J7502J1503

J7501C36

C33

L5J2

004

J200

5J2

006

IC3 HS

2

D9

J050

1

J100

3J0

502

R29

R37

Q3

R38

C35

R39

HS

1

C50

C84

Q

4D

8R

281

31

3

IC2

I0 C30

TR2

R261

3LU

G2

PC

1 3

1

D3

D2

R41

J050

3R

49C

38

ZD

1

C13

C37

R3

R4

TR13

3

1

1

J200

3

J1201

PT

1

C89

R42

R43

R34

1

R33J1

001

R35

R36

D10

R44R45

C40

R46

R

48

C34

R47

R31

R30

C39

R40

J200

7J1

504

J200

8

R25

R27

ZD3ZD2

J1004

J2501A

ZC REM 12 5 G G G G 24 SF24

C22

15

J150

2

EB

J100

3A

D4

J1501A

15

C1

9

J050

4

2A1/2

2-3-3

Terminals (CN) Voltage RemarksTB-1 TB-2 120 V AC 120 V AC supply, inputTB-1 TB-2 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC supply, inputTB-3 TB-4 120 V AC 120 V AC supply for FH, outputTB-3 TB-4 220-240 V AC 220-240 V AC supply for FH, output1-1 1-3 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for MPCB, output (when SSW is on)1-2 1-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for MPCB, output1-7 1-5 5.1 V DC 5.1 V DC supply for MPCB, output1-8 1-6 12 V DC 12 V DC supply for MPCB, output1-9 1-5 0/5 V DC FH on/off, input1-10 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal, output2-1 2-5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SSW, output2-3 2-5 24/0 V DC SSW on/off, input

2A1/2

2-3-4

2-3-2 Main PCB

Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram

The main PCB (MPCB) consists mainly of the CPU IC11. It communicates with the printer controller and controls thememory PCB, image processing system and engine drive system.The CPU IC11 operates on an 8-bit bus. It uses the SRAM IC12, IC15 and IC17 for work memory and backup memory. Inaccordance with the control program in FEEPROM IC55, the CPU IC11 communicates with the printer controller via theserial communication function in the CPU. The CPU IC11 also controls the CCD PCB (CCDPCB), which is for image inputcontrol, and the LSU, which is for image output control, via the image processing ASIC MIP IC21, and drives the operationsection and machine, conveys paper and detects abnormalities via XIO IC31.

CCD PCB

Clock signal

Main PCB

S/H IC(IC41)

ADC(IC43)

MIP(IC21)FEEPROM

(IC55)

CPU(IC11)

SRAM(IC12,14,15)

XIO(IC31)

Driver

BUF

Driver

ODD

EVEN

Print data

Printer data

Memory image data

Address bus

Data bus

Control signal output

Control signal output

*: Optional.**: Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 18 cpm copier.

Detection signal input

Detection signal input

Analog image data

LSU

Printer controller*

Memory PCB**

SDF (15 cpm)

ADF (18 cpm)

Optional drawer*

Operation unit PCB

Drive unit

Scanner unit

Imaging unit

Paper feed unit

Fixing unit

High-voltage transformer PCB

2A1/2

2-3-5

Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram

E

B

EB

B

CC

Q13

Q12

b2

b1 a2 a1

b40

b39

a40

a39

CN

19

D11

3 2

14

C122

C118

C119

C115C114

IC15

L13

14

14 15

R168

24IC

12

C72

6 R797R792R791

38IC14

8 8

525

4

4 45

4 5

5

117

118

RA

RA

8081

RA

17 RA

11R

A12

RA

13R

A15

RA

16R

A11

3 R

A14

C11

6C

117

RA

111

RA

RA1

11

L14

19

RA

18R

A

RA 11

54

116

R157

R179

R159R155

178

177R

R28

E

C

Q11

R154R152R150R144

RA

114

51 50

L11

C16

C15

C11

C12

C13

C14

100

IC11

1

IC32

30

31L1

2

C110C111

X11

5 7

8

4

8

C18

C17

L16L89

C19C822

C817

IC13

R111

R341

R380R112R113

R114R116

R118C38C37

L32

73

R122

R124

R125

R129

R130R131

R132R135R134R136

R137

R379

R127

R120

7 814 R7114

R768R784

R7116C721

C36

C35

C53

L33

R324 R325

C720

R767

C79L723

L727

B

C

E

IC72

IC31

3

1

C71

0

L724

D58

D59

D72

L724 C51

C714

C719

CN2

CN1

L52

L51

L719

R775

R774R773

R7118

R786

1

43

12

4 1

1

D51

1413

7

10

R37

6R

378

R37

7R

367

R36

6R

365

R36

4R

363

R35

3R

352

R35

0R

349

R34

8R

347

R34

6R

345

R34

3

L35

R37

3R

375

R37

4R

372

R37

1R

370

R36

9R

368

R36

2R

361

R36

0R

359

R35

8R

357

R35

6R

355

R35

4R

3442A

1280

1

2A22

803

RE

V:3

R170

R384

37R385

C34C33L34

R381 C32

L31

C31

R38

2R

383

C39

C

310

R33

7R

336

R33

5

72

36144

1

814

108109

R268R269

R261

R255

R254R250R248

R251R267R264R249R247

L210

R270R271

R272

R273

L24

L25

L29C28

C211C210

L21C22C23

R26

156

157

R24

X22X21

208 L2

3

C25

C24

C26

C27

L22

1

IC21

C21

5

C21

4

R23

3R

232

R23

1R

230

R22

9

L44

C42

7C

426

C42

5C

424

L43

C21

2C

213

5253

L27

L26

L28

C21

6

TP

46R

430

R17

3

L812 R

171

TP

45

TP

47L8

11C

821

C82

0

TP

48Q

52

C21

7

R222

C420C421

R223X23

BT

11

L68

L61

Q67

E

C

B

R662

R663R664R665

R667

L610L63

R668R670R671R674R672R682

R669R677R673

R678R675R679

R691

R696

R694R685R683

L64

L65

L66

L611

R61

35

C22

0C

221

C21

9

L29

105

C22

2R

245

R23

9

R24

3R

246

R24

4

R24

2

R24

1

R24

013

IC41

24

25 13 24IC43

IC42

12

10

1144TP

420

L55

R516R176

R172

R174

C824

C611

R6133

R6109R6110R6134R6111

C120

R175

C823R7121R7120R7119

C121C518

R

X24

IC44

3

4 1

1

2R445

C430

D41C88C87 L84

R446

L416

CN18 CN17 CN16 CN121016

21

6

16

5

C42

C41

L41

C410

C411C412

C413

R410C49

C44

C46

C C416

C45

L49

L42

L47

L46L45

L421

C422

423

C43

TP42

TP41

TP 43A14

DG

R44

8L4

13L4

14L4

15R

453

L412

R45

7

7 F125

8 D42 K

R44

7

S

Q47

E

E

E

EB B

B

B

B

C

C

C

C C

C

C

Q

Q41

R47

112

48

37Q42

Q43

Q45

36

C48

Q46

C47

C14

7

C41

4C

428

C42

9

18

EB

E

44

L410

L411

415

R41

7

R43

9R

440

R43

7R

438

R43

6

L48

EB

BE

CC

Q51

AA

KK

4

85

D13

D12

TP

61T

P62

b1 b2 a2 a1

IC17

IC57

D53

D52

D57

E Q53

B

C

EQ

54C

N20

C512

C524

D56

D55

F51

D54

c

C522

C523

C819

C818

L522

511

L521

L520

18 9R556

R553R552

2

CN14 R551

R555

R554

L

L519

EQ

55B C

R54

9

L524

CN15

CN11

CN13

CN8

L54

L59R534

C729

R533R758

R7108

R782R759

L713

C816

CN7

C815

R525 L73

L74

L79

L72

L71

L76R730R728

C812C811

C810C89

C85

C82L612

L613

L81

L85L82C83

C84

C81

R727R729

R726L75 L78 R7111

R719

R711R710R79

C69R617

R713R712

L710L711L712

R75

L86

R74R77

R76

R610

R68

R66R64

R58R57

R62

R612C55 L53C54

R618

R616

R6132

R6131

L420R471

R776

3 2

R718R717

C728

R749CN9

748R

L514R524R538

14

1817

65

8241

11

1

7

14

12

1817

11

15

CN5

CN3

CN4

CN6

2

2

21

1

21

1

R55

7B

B

C

E C

BQ

57R54

8Q

56

L810

1

1

12

2

2

4

3

14

L56

R528R517R763

R527R526

L88

L83C86

8

IC52

5

14

4

LA63

58

D71

8

8

7 8

8

7

7

7

20

1616

998

8

Q74

CR

7110E

BC

EB

Q75

IC51

R71

06

C

CB

E

CC

C

C

CC

CC

CQ

72

Q73

AEAB

KK

Q61

Q62

Q63

Q64

Q65

Q66

EB

16

R46

8R

469

C43

2

L418R46

7

43D

BE

IC71

IC45

IC53

IC55

1110IC

61

8

1414

a20

a19

b20

b19 IC

54

IC56

Q71

2815

RA 110

20

R 429

104

2A1/2

2-3-6

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-3 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input (when SSW is on)1-2 1-4 24 V DC 24 V DC supply from PSPCB, input1-7 1-5 5.1 V DC 5.1 V DC supply from PSPCB, input1-8 1-6 12 V DC 12 V DC supply from PSPCB, input1-9 1-5 0/5 V DC FH on/off, output1-10 1-5 0/5 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal, input2-2 1-6 0 - 14 V DC TNS control voltage, output2-3 3-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for TNS, output2-4 1-6 0 - 5 V DC TNS detection voltage, input2-6 3-2 24/0 V DC TFM drive control signal (+), output2-7 3-2 0/24 V DC TFM drive control signal (–), output3-1 3-2 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for PM, output3-3 3-2 24/0 V DC PM on/off, output3-4 3-10 0/5 V DC MSYNC signal, output3-5 3-10 0/5 V DC (pulse) PM drive clock pulse, output3-6 3-2 24/0 V DC CL on/off, output3-7 3-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CL, output3-8 3-2 24/0 V DC MSW on/off, input3-9 3-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for MSW, output3-11 3-10 0/5 V DC DDSW on/off, input3-13 3-12 0/5 V DC RSW on/off, input3-14 3-12 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for RSW, output4-1 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG0 signal, output4-2 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG1 signal, output4-3 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG2 signal, output4-4 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG3 signal, output4-5 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG4 signal, output4-6 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG5 signal, output4-7 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG0 signal, output4-8 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG1 signal, output4-9 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG2 signal, output4-10 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG3 signal, output4-11 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG4 signal, output4-12 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG5 signal, output4-13 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG6 signal, output4-14 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG7 signal, output4-15 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB KEY0 signal, input4-16 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB KEY1 signal, input5-2 5-10 0/5 V DC STFSW* on/off, input5-3 5-10 0/5 V DC STDDSW* on/off, input5-4 5-10 0/5 V DC STSSW* on/off, input5-5 5-10 0/5 V DC Optional drawer* set signal, input5-6 5-10 0/5 V DC (pulse) STFM* drive clock pulse, output5-7 5-11 0/24 V DC STFM* on/off, output5-8 5-11 0/24 V DC STPFCL* on/off, output5-9 5-10 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for optional drawer*, output5-12 5-11 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for optional drawer*, output6-1 6-14 24/0 V DC BYPPFCL on/off, output6-2 6-14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for BYPPFCL, output6-3 6-14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCL, output6-4 6-14 24/0 V DC PFCL on/off, output6-5 6-14 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for RCL, output6-6 6-14 24/0 V DC RCL on/off, output6-7 1-6 0 - 5 V DC Transfer charging control voltage, output6-8 6-14 0/5 V DC Transfer charging on/off, output6-9 1-6 0 - 5 V DC Developing bias control voltage, output

*: Optional.

2A1/2

2-3-7

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks6-10 6-14 0/5 V DC Developing bias on/off, output6-11 6-14 0/5 V DC Main charging ALM signal, input6-12 1-6 0 - 5 V DC GRID control voltage, output6-13 6-14 0/5 V DC Main charging on/off, output6-15 6-14 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for HVTPCB, output9-1 1-6 – ETTH detection voltage, input9-3 1-6 0 - 5 V DC HUMSENS detection voltage, input9-4 9-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for HUMSPCB, output11-2 11-1 0/5 V DC SHPSW on/off, input11-3 11-1 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for HUMSPCB, output11-5 11-4 0/5 V DC ESW on/off, input11-6 11-4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for ESW, output11-7 11-4 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for FTH, output11-8 1-6 0 - 5 V DC FTH detection voltage, input11-10 11-9 0/5 V DC DFTSW on/off, input11-11 11-9 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DFTSW, output11-13 11-12 0/5 V DC DFODSW on/off, input11-14 11-12 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DFODSW, output11-16 11-15 0/5 V DC SDF set signal, input11-18 11-17 0/5 V DC ADF set signal, input12-1 12-5 0/24 V DC EL on/off, output12-2 12-5 0/24 V DC EL on/off, output12-3 12-5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for INPCB, output12-4 12-5 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for INPCB, output13-1 13-2 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for DM, output13-4 13-3 0/5 V DC (pulse) DM drive clock pulse, output13-5 13-2 0/24 V DC DM on/off, output14-1 13-2 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for OFM*, output14-2 13-2 24 V DC SF 24 V DC supply for OFM*, output14-3 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) OFM* coil energization pulse, output (A)14-4 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) OFM* coil energization pulse, output (B)14-5 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) OFM* coil energization pulse, output (_A)14-6 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) OFM* coil energization pulse, output (_B)14-7 13-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DFSSW*, output14-9 13-2 24/0 V DC DFSSW* on/off, input15-1 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (_A)15-2 13-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SM, output15-3 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (A)15-4 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (B)15-5 13-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for SM, output15-6 13-2 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM coil energization pulse, output (_B)15-6 13-2 24/0 V DC DFCHSOL** on/off, output15-7 13-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for DFCHSOL**, output15-10 13-2 0/5 V DC DFOCSW on/off, input15-11 13-2 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for DFOCSW, output15-12 13-2 0/24 V DC CFM on/off, output15-13 13-2 0/24 V DC CFM half speed/full speed, output15-14 13-2 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for CFM, output16-1 16-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB clock pulse, output16-3 16-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB clock pulse, output16-5 16-6 0/5 V DC CCDPCB RESET signal, output16-7 16-8 0/5 V DC CCDPCB CLP signal, output16-9 16-10 0/5 V DC CCDPCB SHIFT signal, output17-1 17-2 – CCDPCB image signal (ODD), input17-3 17-4 – CCDPCB image signal (EVEN), input17-5 17-6 12 V DC 12 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output

*: For the 18 cpm copier only. **: For the 15 cpm copier only.

2A1/2

2-3-8

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks18-1 18-2 0/5 V DC LDPCB BD signal, input18-3 18-2 5 V DC SF 5 V DC supply for LDPCB, output18-5 18-2 0/5 V DC LDPCB ENABLE signal, input18-6 18-2 0/5 V DC LDPCB VIDEO signal, input18-7 18-2 0/5 V DC LDPCB ADJUST signal, input

2A1/2

2-3-9

2-3-3 Operation PCB

Figure 2-3-5 Operation unit PCB block diagram

The operation unit PCB (OPCB) consists of key switches and LEDs. The lighting of LEDs is determined by scan signals(SCAN [0] to SCAN [7]) and LED lighting selection signals (LEDON [0] to LEDON [5]) from the main PCB (MPCB). The keyswitches operated are identified by the scan signals (SCAN [0] to SCAN [7]) and the return signals (key sen [0], [1]).As an example, to light “a1”, the LED lighting selection signal (LEDON [0]) should be driven low in synchronization with alow level on the scan signal (SCAN [7]). LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations.As another example, if “K2” is pressed, the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal(SCAN [6]) back to the main PCB (MPCB) via the return signal (key sen [0]). The main PCB (MPCB) locates the positionwhere the line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross, and thereby determines which keyswitch was operated.

CN2-2

CN2-1

CN1-3CN1-2CN1-1CN2-7CN2-6CN2-5CN2-4CN2-3

CN1-9

CN1-8

CN1-7

CN1-6

CN1-5

CN1-4

key_sen[0]

key_sen[1]

_SCAN[0]_SCAN[1]_SCAN[2]_SCAN[3]_SCAN[4]_SCAN[5]_SCAN[6]_SCAN[7]

_LEDON[0]

_LEDON[1]

_LEDON[2]

_LEDON[3]

_LEDON[4]

_LEDON[5]

K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8

a1 b1 c1 d1 e1 f1 g1 DP1

a2 b2 c2 d2 e2 f2 g2 DP2

a3 b3 c3 d3 e3 f3 g3 DP3

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8

L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14-1 L15 L16

L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L14-3

D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

K14 K1 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13

2A1/2

2-3-10

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks2-1 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB KEY1 signal, output2-2 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB KEY0 signal, output2-3 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG7 signal, input2-4 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG6 signal, input2-5 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG5 signal, input2-6 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG4 signal, input2-7 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG3 signal, input1-1 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG2 signal, input1-2 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG1 signal, input1-3 4-18 0/5 V DC (pulse) OPCB DIG0 signal, input1-4 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG5 signal, input1-5 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG4 signal, input1-6 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG3 signal, input1-7 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG2 signal, input1-8 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG1 signal, input1-9 4-18 0/5 V DC OPCB SEG0 signal, input

Figure 2-3-6 Operation unit PCB silk-screen diagram

K1

K3 K4 K6 K9K8

K10 K7

K11

2A12807 REV:2

K12

L20TH

CN2

CN1

1

19

7

K2 K5

K14 K13

L13

L11L12

L6L5L4

L15

L14R1

G32

JP20L3

L2

L1D3

D2

D5

D4 D6

D8

D7

L19LED 141

1528

L21

L17L16

L7

L8

L9

L10

L18

JP41

JP19

JP1

JP2

JP7

JP8

JP16 JP

12JP

17JP

18

JP4

JP31

JP32

JP33

JP37

JP27

JP23

JP24

JP5

JP6

JP39

JP40 JP

29

JP30

JP36

JP38

JP14JP

9

JP11

JP28JP

25

JP13

JP15

JP10

JP35

JP27

JP34

JP42

JP21

JP26

JP3

2A1/2-2

2A1/2

2-3-11

2-3-4 CCD PCB

1

2

RESET

CLP

SHIFT

ODD

EVEN

RESET

CLP

Logic IC1

Main PCBCCD PCB

Clock signal generator ASIC

Analog signal processing circuit

CCDIC2

Transistor TR2

Transistor TR1

SHIFT

ODD

EVEN

1

2

Figure 2-3-7 CCD PCB block diagram

The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is equipped with a CCD sensor IC2 for original scanning.The CCD sensor IC2 is controlled by the clock signals φ1, φ2, RESET, CLP and SHIFT for CCD drive from the main PCB(MPCB) via logic IC1.Image signals are analog signals. Even- and odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals areamplified by emitter followers in the transistors TR1 and TR2 and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit inthe main PCB (MPCB).

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-2 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB clock pulse, input1-3 1-4 0/5 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB clock pulse, input1-5 1-6 0/5 V DC CCDPCB RESET signal, input1-7 1-8 0/5 V DC CCDPCB CLP signal, input1-9 1-10 0/5 V DC CCDPCB SHIFT signal, input2-1 2-2 – CCDPCB image signal (ODD), output2-3 2-4 – CCDPCB image signal (EVEN), output2-5 2-6 12 V DC 12 V DC supply from MPCB, input

2A1/2

2-3-12

2-3-5 Laser diode PCB

Figure 2-3-8 Laser diode PCB block diagram

The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) consists of the laser diode LD1 and laser driver IC1.The laser driver IC1 on the laser diode PCB (LDPCB) turns the laser diode LD1 on and off according to the image datareceived from the main PCB (MPCB). Upon detection of a laser beam from the laser diode LD1, the photo sensor PH1outputs a horizontal sync signal (/BD) to the main PCB (MPCB).The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) adjusts the laser diode drive current (APC) for each line scanned outside the image areawhen /ADJUST is low to keep the laser beam output constant.

Terminals (CN) Voltage Remarks1-1 1-2 0/5 V DC LCDPCB BD signal, input1-3 1-2 5 V DC SF 5 V DC supply for LCDPCB, input1-5 1-2 0/5 V DC LCDPCB ENABLE signal, input1-6 1-2 0/5 V DC LCDPCB VIDEO signal, input1-7 1-2 0/5 V DC LCDPCB ADJUST signal, output

2A1/2

2-4-1

Timing chart No. 1 From the main switch turned on to machine stabilization

70 ms

280 ms

450 ms

450 ms

450 ms

1500 ms 5500 ms40 ms

45 ms

240 ms

CN13-5

CN6-13

CN6-9

CN15-12

CN15-1,3,4,6

CN12-1,2

CN11-2

DM

CN6-10DB REM

MC REM

DB CNT

CFM

SM

CN14-3,4,5,6

OFM

EL

SHPSW

MSW On

Primary stabilization fixing temperature 125°C/257°F

Fixing temperature

Secondary stabilizationfixing temperature180°C/356°F

2A1/2

2-4-2

Timing chart No. 2 Copying an A4R/81/2" × 11"R original onto a sheet of A4R/81/2" × 11"R copy paper from the drawer, magnification ratio 100%

20 × 4 ms50 ms

70 ms

1000 ms

80 ms

95 × 5 ms 95 × 5 ms

40 × 12 ms 40 × 12 ms

180 ms60 ms

150 ms

710 ms

160 ms

300 ms700 ms

215 ms

150 ms

1700 ms

665 ms

550 ms

90 ms

120 ms

100 ms

180 ms


Trailing edge registration

Start key On

PM CN3-3

CN3-4

CN18-6

CN13-5

CN6-13

CN6-12

CN6-9

CN6-8

CN6-7

CN6-4

CN3-13

CN6-6

CN11-5

CN3-5

MSYNC

VIDEO

DM

CN6-10DB REM

MC REM

GRID CNT

DB CNT

TC REM

TC CNT

PFCL

RSW

RCL

ESW

PVSYNC

2A1/2

2-4-3

Timing chart No. 3 Continuous copying of an A4R/81/2" × 11"R original onto two sheets of A4R/81/2" × 11"R copy paper from the drawer, magnification ratio 100%

20 × 4 ms50 ms

70 ms

1000 ms

80 ms

95 × 5 ms 95 × 5 ms

40 × 12 ms 40 × 12 ms

180 ms60 ms

150 ms

710 ms

160 ms

300 ms700 ms

260 ms

150 ms

1700 ms 1700 ms

160 ms

300 ms

200 ms

150 ms

665 ms

630 ms

90 ms

120 ms

100 ms

180 ms

260 ms

Start key On

PM CN3-3

CN3-4

CN18-6

CN13-5

CN6-13

CN6-12

CN6-9

CN6-8

CN6-7

CN6-4

CN3-13

CN6-6

CN11-5

CN3-5

MSYNC

VIDEO

DM

CN6-10DB REM

MC REM

GRID CNT

DB CNT

TC REM

TC CNT

PFCL

RSW

RCL

ESW

PVSNC Leading edge registration Leading edge registration

Trailing edge registration Trailing edge registration

2A1/2

2-4-4

Timing chart No. 4 Copying an A4R/81/2" × 11"R original from the SDF onto a sheet of A4R/81/2" × 11"R copy paper from the optional drawer, magnification ratio 100% (15 cpm copier)

20 × 4 ms50 ms

70 ms

1000 ms

80 ms

95 × 5 ms 95 × 5 ms

40 × 12 ms 40 × 12 ms

180 ms50 ms

160 ms

300 ms

260 ms

260 ms 1700 ms 150 ms

665 ms

630 ms

90 ms

120 ms

100 ms

180 ms

DFODSW

PM CN3-3

CN11-13

CN3-4

CN18-6

CN13-5

CN6-13

CN6-12

CN6-9

CN6-8

CN6-7

CN3-13

CN6-6

CN11-5

CN3-5

MSYNC

VIDEO

DM

CN6-10DB REM

MC REM

GRID CNT

DB CNT

TC REM

TC CNT

RSW

RCL

ESW

PVSYNC

50 ms

150 ms

380 ms

1200 ms

CN5-7STFM

CN5-8STPFCL

CN5-2STFSW



2A1/2

2-4-5

Timing chart No. 5 Continuous copying of an A4R/81/2" × 11"R original from the ADF onto two sheets of A4R/81/2" × 11"R copy paper from the bypass table, magnification ratio 100% (18 cpm copier)

20 × 4 ms50 ms

2000 ms

3000 ms 1700 ms

70 ms

1000 ms

80 ms

95 × 5 ms 95 × 5 ms

40 × 12 ms 40 × 12 ms

180 ms60 ms

150 ms

710 ms

160 ms

300 ms

260 ms

150 ms

1700 ms260 ms

1700 ms

160 ms

300 ms

200 ms

150 ms

665 ms

630 ms

90 ms

120 ms

100 ms

180 ms

260 ms

Start key On

PM CN3-3

CN3-4

CN18-6

CN13-5

CN6-13

CN6-12

CN6-9

CN6-8

CN6-7

CN6-1

CN3-13

CN6-6

CN11-5

CN3-5

MSYNC

VIDEO

DM

CN6-10DB REM

MC REM

GRID CNT

DB CNT

TC REM

TC CNT

BYPPFCL

RSW

RCL

ESW

PVSYNC

CN11-10DFTSW

CN14-3,4,5,6

OFM

CN15-1,3,4,6

SM

170 ms

500 ms

300 ms 100 ms

200 ms





2A1/2

2-4-6

• C

har

t o

f im

age

adju

stm

ent

pro

ced

ure

s

Item

Imag

eD

escr

ipti

on

Item

No.

Copy

exp

osur

e in

dica

tor

Ori

gin

alP

age

Rem

arks

Mai

nte

nan

ce m

od

eA

dju

st-

ing

ord

er

Adj

ustin

g th

e LS

U p

rint s

tart

tim

ing

Adj

ustin

g th

e ce

nter

line

of

the

bypa

ss ta

ble

(prin

ting

adju

stm

ent)

Exp

.1 (

flash

ing)

1-6-

14U

034

U03

4 te

st

patte

rn2

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

turn

ing

on ti

min

g (s

econ

dary

pap

er fe

ed s

tart

tim

ing)

Adj

ustin

g th

e le

adin

g ed

ge

regi

stra

tion

(prin

ting

adju

st-

men

t)

Exp

.1 (

lit)

Exp

.3 (

lit)

Exp

.1: P

aper

feed

from

the

dr

awer

.E

xp.2

: Pap

er fe

ed fr

om th

e

bypa

ss tr

ay

1-6-

12U

034

U03

4 te

st

patte

rn3

LSU

illu

min

atio

n st

art t

imin

gA

djus

ting

the

lead

ing

edge

m

argi

n (p

rintin

g ad

just

men

t)E

xp.1

(lit

)

1-6-

15U

402

U40

2 te

st

patte

rn4

LSU

illu

min

atio

n en

d tim

ing

Adj

ustin

g th

e tr

ailin

g ed

ge

mar

gin

(prin

ting

adju

stm

ent)

Exp

.5 (

lit)

1-6-

15

U40

2U

402

test

pa

ttern

5

Driv

e m

otor

spe

ed a

djus

tmen

tA

djus

ting

the

mag

nific

atio

n in

the

auxi

liary

sca

nnin

g di

-re

ctio

n (p

rintin

g ad

just

men

t)

Exp

.1 (

lit)

1-

4-11

U05

3U

053

test

pa

ttern

1

LSU

illu

min

atio

n st

art/e

nd ti

min

gA

djus

ting

the

left

and

right

m

argi

ns (

prin

ting

adju

st-

men

t)

Exp

.3 (

lit)

1-

6-15

U40

2U

402

test

pa

ttern

6

Dat

a pr

oces

sing

Adj

ustin

g m

agni

ficat

ion

of

the

scan

ner

in th

e m

ain

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n (s

cann

ing

adju

stm

ent)

Exp

.1 (

lit)

No

adju

stm

ent f

or c

opyi

ng

usin

g th

e D

F.1-

6-27

U06

5Te

st c

hart

7

Orig

inal

sca

nnin

g sp

eed

Adj

ustin

g m

agni

ficat

ion

of

the

scan

ner

in th

e au

xilia

ry

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n (s

cann

ing

adju

stm

ent)

Exp

.3 (

lit) ––

U06

5: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U07

0: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

28

1-6-

49

U06

5

U07

0

Test

cha

rt

8

2A1/2

2-4-7

Whe

n m

aint

enan

ce it

em U

092

(Adj

ustin

g th

e sc

anne

r au

tom

atic

ally

) is

run

usi

ng th

e sp

ecifi

ed o

rigin

al(P

/N 2

A16

8070

), th

e fo

llow

ing

adju

stm

ents

are

aut

omat

ical

ly m

ade:

•A

djus

ting

the

scan

ner

cent

er li

ne (

U06

7)•

Adj

ustin

g th

e sc

anne

r le

adin

g ed

ge r

egis

trat

ion

(U06

6)•

Adj

ustin

g th

e sc

anne

r m

agni

ficat

ion

in th

e au

xilia

ry s

cann

ing

dire

ctio

n (U

065)

Item

Imag

eD

escr

ipti

on

Item

No.

Copy

exp

osur

e in

dica

tor

Ori

gin

alP

age

Rem

arks

Mai

nte

nan

ce m

od

eA

dju

st-

ing

ord

er

Orig

inal

sca

n st

art t

imin

gA

djus

ting

the

lead

ing

edge

re

gist

ratio

n (s

cann

ing

ad-

just

men

t)

–– ––

U06

6: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U07

1: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

29

1-6-

50

U06

6

U07

1

Test

cha

rt

0

Adj

ustin

g th

e ce

nter

line

(s

cann

ing

adju

stm

ent)

–– ––

U06

7: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U07

2: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

30

1-6-

52

U06

7

U07

2

Test

cha

rt

9

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e le

adin

g ed

ge

mar

gin

(sca

nnin

g ad

just

-m

ent)

Exp

.3 (

lit)

Exp

.3 (

lit)

U40

3: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U40

4: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

31

1-6-

53

U40

3

U40

4

Test

cha

rt

!

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e tr

ailin

g ed

ge

mar

gin

(sca

nnin

g ad

just

-m

ent)

Exp

.1 (

flash

ing)

Exp

.1 (

flash

ing)

U40

3: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U40

4: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

31 1-

6-53

U40

3

U40

4

Test

cha

rt

@

Adj

ustin

g th

e or

igin

al s

can

data

(im

age

adju

stm

ent)

Adj

ustin

g th

e le

ft an

d rig

ht

mar

gins

(sc

anni

ng a

djus

t-m

ent)

Left

mar

gin:

E

xp.3

(lit

)R

ight

mar

gin:

E

xp.5

(lit

)

U40

3: F

or c

opyi

ng a

n or

igin

al

plac

ed o

n th

e co

ntac

t gla

ss.

U40

4: F

or c

opyi

ng o

rigin

als

from

the

DF.

1-6-

31

1-6-

53

U40

3

U40

4

Test

cha

rt

#

2A1/2

2-4-8

• Image quality

Item Specifications100% magnification Copier: ±1.0% or less

Using DF: ±1.5% or lessEnlargement/reduction Copier: ±1.5% or less

Using DF: ±2.0% or lessLateral squareness (copier mode) Copier: ±1.5 mm/200 mm or less

Using DF: ±2.0 mm/200 mm or lessMargins (copier mode) A: 3.0 ± 2.5 mm (inch)

3.0 +3.5 mm (metric)B: 3.0 ± 2.5 mmC: 3.0 ± 2.5 mm (inch) 3.0 +3.5 mm (metric)D: 3.0 ± 2.5mm

Margins (printer mode) A: 6.0 ± 2.0 mmB: 6.0 ± 2.5 mmC: 6.0 ± 2.0 mmD: 6.0 ± 2.5 mm

Leading edge registration Drawer: ±2.5 mm or lessBypass: ±2.5 mm or less

Skewed paper feed (left-right difference) Drawer: 2.0 mm/200 mm or lessBypass: 2.0 mm/200 mm or less

Lateral image shifting Drawer: ±2.0 mm or lessBypass: ±3.0 mm or less

–2.5

–2.5

A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

D

1 2

11–

D5

V

16M

361

B30

A30

B1

A1

A20

B1

A1

(15 cpm: OPTION)

(OPTION)

(OPTION)

NETWORKBOAD

MEMORY

MEMPCBPRINTER BOAD

B20

(CN20)

80

(CN19)

1

BK

(CN2)

24V

3 322

4 455

DDSW

RSW

Rth

17 18G

ND

YW

YW

8 46 3 2 1

133

221

4 4

TB4

TB3

21

1

24V

14

CN2

B A

24V

BE

BK

RD

CFM

4321

4321

C

DF

TS

W

24 V

SF

GN

GN

/YW

WE

BK

TH

11

3 2 1

10 1

7

–– –

YW

BE

SG

NC

88

PK

1 31 3

AD

F S

ET

1818

(CN7)

(CN9)

3 45

VH

UM

SG

21

212

SG

MS

W

1098731 11 12 13141

RS

W5

V

1 22 1

RC

L

74 5 624

VR

CL

24V

SG

BKBK

12

21

ESW

3

1S

G1

1

(CN11)

ADF (18 cpm)SDF (15 cpm)

DF

SS

W

9 8 7 5 3864321

SG

24V

BD

88

5 V

SF

SG

VID

EO

11

DM

NO

CO

M

9

SHPSW

DFOCSW

13

PRY

8

0

4

2

1

6

WE

BK

WE

WE

WE

BK

RD

PK

GY

YW

GY

WE

GY

WE

BKR

D

GY

BK

PKLBRD

PK

GN

YW

WE

RD

BE

GN

GY

YW

WE

LB

11

21

RD

21

(CN3)

(CN1)

1

21

12

43

1

61

643216

72 3 5

13 147 8 9 114 6321

2

135

1

3 1

1

19

1

21

5 4 3 2 1

9 1

1

OFM

91

6

C

4

3 1

12467891112

12467891112

MSW

21

65 21

SDF

––7

24 V

2 3 4

5 V

PG

5–

43

–4 52 3

–NC

10 1

6

2

8

24 V

SF

PG

24V

TF

MT

FM

(CN17)

5 69876421 43

CCDPCBDev.biasADF

21C

L

SM

CCD

CLK

971

924

V S

F

1

2

345

LSU

HUMS

19G

RID

TR

MC

TC

SG

2 1

SM

B _ B

SM

_ A24

V

PM

PG

KE

Y1

KE

Y0

DIG

7

DIG

4

DIG

6

DIG

2

DIG

0S

EG

5S

EG

4S

EG

3

SE

G1

SE

G0

14 161511 137 8 9 104 5 621

18

954 121121

65

FD

SE

T

–NC

PG

PG

PF

CL

24V

AG

SG

STSSW

NOCOM

1513

STPFCL

FEEDER(OPTION)

NOCOM

HEATERCIRCUIT

1 2

15

4 5 631

DM

RE

M

765421

PG

5 V

DC

(CN2)

651S

G

TC

CN

T

24 V

SF

(CN16)

24 V

SF

SG

5 V

__

BY

PP

FC

L

1

STFSW

STFM

(CN12)

43

1621E

L

PG

621E

L

INPCB

WE

EL

LB

4 2 1

TNS

BK

BK

21

TFM

2

1HEATER-COM

HEATER-LIVE

OPCB

PF

CL

TB2

TB1

BA

NEUTRALLL

LIVENOISEFILTER

SSW

FTS

FH

FTH

MPCB

PSPCB

BKBNYWGNBEWEPKRDOELBPEGY

BlackBrownYellowGreenBlueWhitePinkRed

OrangeLight bluePurpleGray

Wire color Mark

Wiring diagram

2-4-9

2A1/2-2

©2000 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation

is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

Printed in U.S.A.

KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.Headquarters:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008TEL : (973) 808-8444FAX : (973) 882-6000

New York Show Room:149 West 51st street,New York, NY 10019TEL : (212) 554-2679FAX : (212) 554-2625

Northeastern Region:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008TEL : (973) 808-8444FAX : (973) 882-4401

Midwestern Region:201 Hansen Court Suite 119Wood Dale, Illinois 60191TEL : (630) 238-9982FAX : (630) 238-9487

Western Region:14101 Alton Parkway,P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,California 92618-7006TEL : (949) 457-9000FAX : (949) 457-9119

Southeastern Region:1500 Oakbrook Drive,Norcross, Georgia 30093TEL : (770) 729-9786FAX : (770) 729-9873

Southwestern Region:2825 West Story Road,Irving, Texas 75038-5299TEL : (972) 550-8987FAX : (972) 570-4704

Dallas Parts Distribution Center& National Training Center:2825 West Story Road,Irving, Texas 75038-5299TEL : (972) 659-0055FAX : (972) 570-5816

KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.6120 Kestrel Road,Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8TEL : (905) 670-4425FAX : (905) 670-8116

KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.Av. 16 de Septiembre #407Col. Santa Inés,Delegación AzcapotzalcoMéxico, D.F. C.P. 02130TEL : 3-83-27-41FAX : 3-83-78-04

PARTS LISTPublished in Jan.’01

2A170770

KM-1510/1810Includes: ST-13

Printing System (M)Includes:

NOTE

1.Indicate parts number and machine model when placing an order.

eg. Parts Number Parts Name Machine Model Cycle Quantity

2A104012 FRONT COVER 1510 60Hz 1

2A204012 FRONT COVER 1810 60Hz 1

2.Service calls and freight will be charged separately.

3.Symbols in the "Parts Number" column.

• Parts with "'" indicates the service parts and the parts without "'" can not be supplied.

• Parts with "•" are component parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly appearing immediately above them.

eg. Parts Number Parts Name Parts Number Parts Name

2A168041 LSU ASS'Y •2A105131 LABEL, LASER UNIT

•2A113010 UNIT, LSU

• Parts with "• •" are component parts or sub-assembly with "•" appearing immediately above them.

eg. Parts Number Parts Name Parts Number Parts Name

•2A201010 MEMORY PCB ASS'Y (1510) ••2A226010 MOUNT, MEMORY BOARD (1510)

••2A228010 MEMORY PCB (1510)

4.See the last page of this parts list for the classification of the screws in the illustrations.

Parts List

KM-1510/1810

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2

FIG. 2 FRAMES · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4

FIG. 3 CASSETTE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6

FIG. 4 CONVEYING SECTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8

FIG. 5 DOCUMENT FEEDER (1510) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 10

FIG. 6 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER I (1810) · · · · · · · · · · · · 12

FIG. 7 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER II (1810) · · · · · · · · · · · · 14

FIG. 8 OPTICAL SECTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 16

FIG. 9 LASER SCANNER UNIT · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 18

FIG. 10 IMAGING UNIT(DEVELOPING) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 20

FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT(CLEANING)· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 22

FIG. 12 FIXING SECTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 24

FIG. 13 DRIVING SECTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 26

FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 28

FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 30

FIG. 16 ACCESSORIES & OPTION · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 32

• INDEX· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 34

– 1 –

CONTENTS

2A1/2A2

– 2 –

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

2 10

4

37

5

12

16

8

9

13

13

1819

6

15

17

14

1

11

HDB

HCL

HCL

HDB

HDBBHI

HDB

HAT

HAT

HAT

HAT

HCL

HCL

HAT

HCL

HCL

HCL

HDB

HDB

CIB

CIB

– 3 –

2A1/2A2

• Parts with "•" are component parts or sub-assemblies of theassembly appearing immediately above them.

• Parts with "'" indicates the Service parts.

SP Part. No. Description230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No. SP Part. No. Description

230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.

• Parts with "• •" are component parts or sub-assembly with "•"appearing immediately above them.

FIG. 1 EXTERIOR COVERS

' 1 2A104012 FRONT COVER (1510) 1 1 1' 1 2A204012 FRONT COVER (1810) 1 1 1' 2 2A104021 UPPER FRONT COVER 1 1 1' 3 2A104032 RIGHT COVER 1 1 1' 4 2A104041 LEFT COVER 1 1 1' 5 2A104071 REAR COVER (1510) 1 1 1' 5 2A204021 REAR COVER (1810) 1 1 1' 6 2A104080 COVER,DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1' 7 2A104090 COVER,PRINTER BOARD 1 1 1' 8 2A104100 RIGHT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER 1 1 1' 9 2A104110 LEFT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER 1 1 1' 10 2A105091 LABEL,CONVEYING JAM 1 1 1' 11 2A105140 LABEL,CARTRIDGE OPERATION 1 1 1' 12 2A105160 LABEL,DF CAUTION (1510) 1 1 1

13 49628105 RECEIVER,MAGNET 2 2 214 2A118240 DETECTION PLATE,DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 115 2A118250 SPRING,TANK DETECTION 1 1 116 2A005060 LABEL,HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION(EUR) 1 1 117 71804400 MAGNET,LOWER FRONT COVER 1 1 118 19512210 RETAINING PIN,MIRROR FRAME 1 1 119 2A112700 RETAINING PIN A,MIRROR FRAME 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 4 –

FIG. 2 FRAMES

HAQ

HAQ

HAQ

HAQ

HAQBBK

HAQ

HAUHDG

HDG

HAU

KAK

E05

HBH

HAU

HAU

BBK

BHI

BHI

BBK

BHI

HBH

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HAU

HAU

HAU

HAO

HAU

1

54

19

40

40

40

40 7

20

4 526

29

24

28

32

23

51

1314

5356

5526

27

5

30

22

33

31

21

25

48

12

16

16

50

10

49

17

18

18

41

41

48

9

9

45

48

47

2

15

46

11

46

3

35

35 37

42

44

39

36

38

43

348

8

6

– 5 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


1 2A102010 BASE 1 1 12 2A102021 FRAME IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 13 2A102030 RIGHT FRAME 1 1 14 2A102090 LEFT RAIL,CASSETTE 1 1 15 2A806250 RING STOPPER 1 1 1

' 6 2A107040 SLIDER,CASSETTE 2 2 27 J7330120 PLUG,9715B-12A(IRS) 1 1 1

' 8 68720160 PULLEY,FEED SHIFT 2 2 2' 9 67322230 BUSHING 8 2 2 2' 10 2A106010 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2 2 2' 11 2A106031 RIGHT ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1

12 2A106040 SHAFT,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 13 2A106071 ACTUATOR,REGISTRATION 1 1 1' 14 2A106081 SPRING,REGISTRATION ACTUATOR 1 1 1' 15 2A106160 RIGHT GEAR 15,REGISTRATION 1 1 1' 16 2A106170 PULLEY B,PAPER FEED 2 2 2

17 2A106180 SHAFT,PAPER FEED CL 1 1 118 2A106191 SUPPORT PLATE,GUIDE PULLEY 2 2 2

' 19 2A106200 RIGHT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION 2 2 2' 20 2A106220 GUIDE FILM,PAPER FEED CONFLUENCE 1 1 1' 21 2A106510 PULLEY,BYPASS 1 1 1' 22 2A106530 UPPER GUIDE,BYPASS 1 1 1

23 2A106540 GUIDE,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1' 24 2A106550 HOLDER,BYPASS PAD 1 1 1' 25 2A106560 CAM,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1' 26 2A106570 STOPPER,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1' 27 2A106581 SPRING,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1' 28 2A106590 SPRING,BYPASS PAD 1 1 1' 29 2A106680 PAD,BYPASS 1 1 1

30 2A106690 SHAFT,BYPASS 1 1 131 2A106700 GROUND PLATE,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1

' 32 2A106721 GUIDE,BYPASS PAD 1 1 1' 33 2A106730 FRONT BUSHING,BYPASS 1 1 1

34 2A110150 LIGHT SHIELD,CLEANING LAMP 1 1 135 2A121020 PLATE SPRING,EJECT 2 2 2

' 36 2A121050 STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT 1 1 137 2A121060 GROUND PLATE,EJECT 1 1 138 2A126090 GROUND PLATE,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1

' 39 2A127010 LAMP,CLEANING 1 1 140 65902670 CUSHION RUBBER 4 4 4

FIG. 2 FRAMES

41 34907290 PULLEY,GUIDE 2 2 242 2A127890 TERMINAL,MAIN CHARGER JUNCTION 1 1 143 2A127900 TERMINAL,GRID JUNCTION 1 1 144 2A127910 TERMINAL,TRANSFER JUNCTION 1 1 1

' 45 2AV27340 CLUTCH,BYPASS 1 1 146 2A806030 BUSH FEED 2 2 247 34806150 STOPPER 5 1 1 148 34806480 STOPPER 6 4 4 4

' 49 34906150 INNER BUSHING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 50 34906160 OUTER BUSHING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 51 2A106760 FRICTION PLATE C,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1' 52 2A106230 GUIDE FILM,PRIMARY PAPER FEED 1 1 1

53 2A106740 VIBRATION INSULATOR,PAD HOLDER 1 1 154 2A114340 HOLDER,DEVELOPING 1 1 1

' 55 2A106240 FRONT SHEET,REGISTRATION 1 1 156 2A106770 SHEET,PAD HOLDER 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 6 –

FIG. 3 CASSETTE

4

10

19

16

14

14

172

15

12

11

1318

1

5

3

8

6

9

9

7

HDC

HAT

WAD

– 7 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


' 1 2A107011 COVER,CASSETTE 1 1 12 2A107020 GROUND PLATE,CASSETTE 1 1 13 2A107030 SPRING,CASSETTE 2 2 2

' 4 2A107050 FRONT CLAW CASSETTE 1 1 15 76508130 SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER 1 1 16 19507011 CASSETTE,PAPER FEED 1 1 17 19507040 BASE,CASSETTE 1 1 18 19507050 LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE 1 1 19 19507080 REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC) 2 2

' 10 34907021 FRONT CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1' 11 34907031 REAR CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1' 12 34907050 REAR CLAW,CASSETTE 1 1 1

13 34907060 LEVER,CURSOR RETAINING 1 1 114 34907070 PIN,CLAW CASSETTE 2 2 2

' 15 34907131 REAR STOPPER,PAPER 1 1 116 34907141 GEAR 18,CASSETTE 1 1 117 34907330 LABEL,PAPER UPPER LIMIT 1 1 118 68802070 SPRING A,LIFT UP 1 1 1

' 19 2A107060 FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE 2 2 2

FIG. 3 CASSETTE

2A1/2A2

– 8 –

FIG. 4 CONVEYING SECTION

4

32

31

29

30

3033

333734

34

35

36

38

21

1819

9

19

5

8

3

7

1622

24

2320

25

2510

12

13

11

15

27

21

624 28

26

16

17

14

2523

HDB

HBH

HDB

HDB

HDB

HBH

HBH

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

KAK

E05

KAK

– 9 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


' 1 2A102100 HANDLE,JAM RELEASE 1 1 12 2A102110 FULCRUM PIN,CONVEYING 1 1 1

' 3 2A104052 COVER,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 4 2A105080 LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION 1 1 1' 5 2A106020 LEFT ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1

6 2A106060 SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING 1 1 17 2A106120 FRONT SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING 1 1 1

' 8 2A106150 LEFT GEAR 14,REGISTRATION 1 1 1' 9 2A106210 LEFT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION 2 2 2' 10 2A106810 TABLE,BYPASS 1 1 1' 11 2A106820 COVER,BYPASS TABLE 1 1 1

12 2A106831 FRONT CURSOR,BYPASS 1 1 113 2A106841 REAR CURSOR,BYPASS 1 1 1

' 14 2A116171 STATIC ELIMINATOR,TRANSFER 1 1 1' 15 2A806720 GEAR MPF 1 1 1

16 35904270 HOOK,CONVEYING HANDLE 2 2 217 2A116050 REAR GUIDE TRANSFER 1 1 118 2A116060 HOUSING,CONVEYING 1 1 119 2A116070 SPRING,CONVEYING PRESSURE 2 2 220 2A116080 FRONT SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER 1 1 121 2A116090 REAR SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER 1 1 122 2A116100 SHAFT,HOOK 1 1 1

' 23 2A116111 FRONT BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE 2 2 2' 24 2A116121 REAR BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE 2 2 2

25 2A116130 HOLDER,PRESSURE SPRING 3 3 326 2A116140 TERMINAL,TRANSFER GUIDE 1 1 127 2A116150 HOLDER,TRANSFER PRESSURE SPRING 1 1 128 2A116160 SPRING,CONVEYING RELEASE 1 1 1

' 29 2A168034 TRANSFER ROLLER ASS’Y 1' 29 2A168064 TRANSFER ROLLER ASS’Y(METRIC) 1 1

30 •2AR17080 COLLAR,TRANSFER ROLLER 2 2 2' 31 •2A116010 ROLLER,TRANSFER 1' 31 •2A116200 ROLLER,TRANSFER,METRIC 1 1

32 •2A116020 FRONT GUIDE,TRANSFER 1 1 1' 33 •2A116040 PULLEY,TRANSFER 2 2 2' 34 •2A116180 BUSHING,TRANSFER 2 2 2' 35 •2A116190 GEAR,TRANSFER 1 1 1' 36 •2A116210 FRONT SHEET,TRANSFER GUIDE 1 1 1' 37 •2A116220 CLEANER,TRANSFER 1 1 1' 38 •2A116240 SEAL B,TRANSFER ROLLER 2 2 2

FIG. 4 CONVEYING SECTION

2A1/2A2

– 10 –

FIG. 5 DOCUMENT FEEDER (1510)

16

10

10

1118

3126

31

1118

31

31

HCJ

76

30

88

30

4

5

3

14

14

1

21

17

2

15

25

32

3219

20

29

32

1312

31

33

32

24

19

2328

27

9

22

HAO

HAO

HAO

HAO

– 11 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


' 1 3BP11070 COVER,ADF 1 1 1' 2 3BP11080 HOUSING,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 3 3BP11090 GUIDE,ORIGINAL 1 1 1' 4 3BP11100 ROLLER,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 5 3BP11110 ROLLER,EJECT 1 1 1

6 3BP11120 MOUNT,DRIVE 1 1 1' 7 3BP11130 GEAR 25/19 1 1 1' 8 3BP11140 SPRING,CONVEYING 4 4 4' 9 3BP11150 MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER 1 1 1' 10 3BP11160 UPPER HINGE 2 2 2' 11 3BP11170 LOWER HINGE 2 2 2' 12 3BP11180 ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION 1 1 1' 13 3BP11190 ACTUATOR,TIMING DETECTION 1 1 1' 14 3BP11220 SPRING,ORIGINAL GUIDE 2 2 2

15 3BP11230 WIRE,ADF 1 1 1' 16 3BP11240 FRONT FILM,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 17 3BP11250 REAR FILM,CONVEYING 1 1 1

18 3BP11270 SHAFT,HINGE 2 2 2' 19 3BP11280 PULLEY 22,CONVEYING 2 2 2' 20 3BP11290 GEAR 20,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 21 3BP11300 SHEET,READING 1 1 1

22 3BP11310 TRAY,EJECT 1 1 1' 23 3BP11320 MOUNT,PULLEY 1 1 1

24 3BP11330 RETAINER,TENSION 1 1 1' 25 2A127050 SWITCH,PHOT0 INTERRUPTOR 2 2 2

26 48129208 PIN,TENSION 1 1 1' 27 3A722090 PULLEY,DRIVE 1 1 1' 28 3BR22040 BELT 192,CONVEYING 1 1 1

29 34806140 STOPPER 4 1 1 1' 30 34917170 PULLEY,TRANSFER HOLDER 4 4 4

31 65016080 STOP RING E3 5 5 5' 32 66006840 BUSHING 4 4 4 4

33 M2105020 NYLON CLAMP 4N,NK-4N 1 1 1

FIG. 5 DOCUMENT FEEDER (1510)

2A1/2A2

– 12 –

FIG. 6 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER I (1810)

15

28

3

4

8 6

244

7

20

39

2938

3930

34 38

32

2421

14

25 22

31

1742

43

43

43

48

49

48

36

26

45

18

9

1113

33

33

27

12

10

37

4041

35

23

19

16

15

4646

47

HAD

HAD

HADHAD

HAD

HAD

KAK

KAL

HAD

BHF

BHF

BHF

HCJ

BHF

E03

– 13 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


' 1 3BR02010 BASE,ADF 1 1 12 3BR02020 FRAME,ADF 1 1 13 3BR02030 STAY,ADF 1 1 14 3BR02060 LEVER,RELEASE SWITCH 1 1 15 3BR03010 LEFT HINGE 1 1 16 3BR03040 RIGHT HINGE 1 1 1

' 7 3BR04010 LOWER COVER,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 8 3BR04020 HANDLE,ADF 1 1 1

9 3BR05010 LABEL,ORIGINAL UPPER LIMIT 1 1 1' 10 3BR06010 TABLE,ADF 1 1 1' 11 3BR06020 FRONT CURSOR 1 1 1' 12 3BR06030 REAR CURSOR 1 1 1' 13 3BR06040 COVER,TABLE 1 1 1' 14 3BR07010 COVER,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 15 3BR07040 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 16 3BR07070 SHAFT,PAPER FEED 1 1 1

17 3BR07260 UPPER FILM,CONVEYING 1 1 1' 18 3BR07110 ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION 1 1 1' 19 3BR07130 BELT 114,PAPER FEED 1 1 1

20 3BR07140 MOUNT,HANDLE 1 1 121 3BR07150 FRONT HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 122 3BR07160 REAR HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 1

' 23 3BR07170 HANDLE,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 124 3BR07220 FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 125 3BR07230 REAR SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 126 3A707060 SHAFT,LEADING FEED 1 1 127 2A807050 GEAR CASSETTE 1 1 128 48128609 PIN,UPPER FRONT COVER 1 1 1

' 29 29806560 BUSHING 6 1 1 1' 30 29806810 BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION 1 1 1

31 29822280 SPRING,PF COUPLER 1 1 1' 32 3AL05120 LABEL,DF ORIGINAL CAUTION 1 1 1

33 3AL06090 CUSHION,ORIGINAL GUIDE 2 2 234 3A707110 GEAR 30,PAPER FEED 1 1 1

' 35 3A707120 PULLEY,LEADING FEED 1 1 1' 36 3BC07130 ONE-WAY CLUTCH 6 1 1 1' 37 3BP11150 MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER 1 1 1

38 34806150 STOPPER 5 2 2 239 34907070 PIN,CLAW CASSETTE 2 2 2

' 40 3A707030 PULLEY,LEADING FEED 1 1 1

41 36211500 GEAR,LEADING FEED JOINT 1 1 142 68721640 PULLEY 20,DUPLEX CONVEYING 1 1 143 78620710 CLAW STOPPER 3 3 344 M2105010 NYLON CLAMP 3N,NK-3N 1 1 145 3BR07290 SHAFT,LEADING FEED 1 1 146 29806710 PULLEY,RELEASE LEVER 2 2 247 3AL08170 PULLEY,EJECT 2 2 248 65016080 STOP RING E3 3 3 349 C2804100 POLYESTER SLIDER WASHER 4.1X10X0.5T 5 5 5

FIG. 6 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER I (1810)

2A1/2A2

– 14 –

FIG. 7 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER II (1810)

1

53

2

57

45

45

57

38

38

59

61

17

18

3

8

811

9

16

36

36

16

19

37

3710 65

50

6

1244

44

7

49

42

48

43

4

5562

5

5863

64

13

41

47

15

25

23

23

24

52

34

56

51

51

4926

40

27

31

20

2122

35

30 32 60

2854

49

49

4956

3346 39

39

29

49

49

14

BMF

HADHAD

HAD

HAD

HAD

HADHAD

HAD

HAD

KAK

HAD

DJW

KAL

KAL

HADHADHAD

HAD

– 15 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


1 3BR02080 MOUNT,RELEASE SWITCH 1 1 1' 2 3BR07020 UPPER ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1' 3 3BR07030 LOWER ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1

4 3BR07050 GUIDE,LIFT 1 1 15 3BR07060 GUIDE,PAPER FEED 1 1 16 3BR07080 SHAFT,LIFT 1 1 17 3BR07120 LEVER,LIFT 1 1 18 3BR07180 SPRING,SEPARATION PULLEY 2 2 29 3BR07190 MOUNT,TIMING SWITCH 1 1 1

' 10 3BR07200 ACTUATOR,TIMING SWITCH 1 1 111 3BR07210 MOUNT,SEPARATION PULLEY 1 1 112 3BR07240 GROUND PLATE,SEPARATION PULLEY 1 1 113 3BR08010 STAY,CONVEYING 1 1 114 3BR08020 GUIDE,CONVEYING 1 1 115 3BR08030 GUIDE,READING 1 1 116 3BR08040 SPRING,READING 2 2 217 3BR08050 FILM A,CONVEYING 3 3 318 3BR08060 FILM B,CONVEYING 2 2 2

' 19 3BR10010 UPPER ROLLER,EJECT 1 1 120 3BR10030 UPPER GUIDE,EJECT 1 1 121 3BR10040 LOWER GUIDE,EJECT 1 1 122 3BR10050 FILM,EJECT 1 1 123 3BR10060 PULLEY,FEED 2 2 224 3BR10070 PLATE SPRING,EJECT PULLEY 1 1 125 3BR10080 SHAFT,EJECT PULLEY 1 1 126 3BR22010 MOUNT,ADF MOTOR 1 1 127 3BR22020 GEAR 42/20,PAPER FEED 1 1 128 3BR22030 CAM,LIFT 1 1 1

' 29 3BR22040 BELT 192,CONVEYING 1 1 130 3BR22060 GEAR 38,LIFT 1 1 131 3BR22070 GEAR,DRIVE ADF 1 1 1

' 32 3BR22080 SQUARE SPRING,CAM 1 1 133 3BR22090 TENSION PLATE B,DRIVE 1 1 134 3BR27010 WIRE,ADF 1 1 1

' 35 3BR27020 MOTOR,ADF 1 1 1 ' 36 2A127050 SWITCH,PHOTO INTERRUPTOR 2 2 2

37 28107301 PRESSING SPRING 2 2 2' 38 29806560 BUSHING 6 2 2 2' 39 29806810 BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION 2 2 2

40 3BR07360 SPRING,LIFT 1 1 1

FIG. 7 AUTO DOCUMENT FEEDER II (1810)

' 41 3AL07250 REAR STATIC ELIMINATOR,PAPER FEED 1 1 142 3A707020 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 1 1 143 3A707070 SHAFT,SEPARATION 1 1 144 3A707090 HOLDER,SEPARATION PULLEY 2 2 245 3A722040 PULLEY 24,CONVEYING 2 2 246 3A722090 PULLEY,DRIVE 1 1 1

' 47 3BP11300 SHEET,READING 1 1 1' 48 33906070 TORQUE LIMITER,PAPER FEED 1 1 1

49 34806150 STOPPER 5 10 10 1050 35320300 SPRING,EJECT ACTUATOR 1 1 151 35322020 GEAR 20,PAPER FEED DRIVE 2 2 2

' 52 35911790 GEAR 20,PAPER FEED PULLEY 1 1 1' 53 63527020 SAFETY,SWITCH 1 1 1

54 65011310 GEAR 20,IDLE 1 1 1' 55 3BR07270 PAD,LIFT 1 1 1' 56 72107160 BUSHING 6,LOWER REGISTRATION ROLLER 2 2 2

57 74808080 BEARING,686ZZNR 2 2 258 3BR07350 FRONT FILM,PAD SEPARATION 1 1 159 M1203200 OPEN BUSHING,OCB-375 1 1 160 M2105720 MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 1 1 161 M2107120 BINDING BAND SG-130 1 1 162 3BR07280 FILM,LIFT 1 1 163 3BR07310 FRONT PLATE SPRING,SEPARATION 1 1 164 3BR07320 FRONT PAD,SEPARATION 1 1 165 3BR07330 FRONT FILM,SEPARATION 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 16 –

FIG. 8 OPTICAL SECTION

1

2

53

69

53

53

17

28

8

27

37

3665

1813 57

22

2360

52

6052

54

72

71

3

50

4

49

49

5573

7354

55

11

7

7 48

48

61 66

21

61

61

61

48

48

5539

5539

12

5370

53

10

9

6

9

16

15

44

14

5

46

45

43

61

61

48

48

4848

24

32

47

3864

42

62

63

41

3319

3456

56

55

58

3130

59

35

25

26

51

67

29

57

4068

20

HBH

HBH

HBH

BVV

BVV

E07

E07

BVV

HBH

HBH

HBH

RDE

RDE

RDE

HBH

HAO

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

KKM

E05 E05

BBA

HBH

HBH

HBHHBH

RDE

RDE

HDB

HBH

HBH

– 17 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


1 2A100010 SCANNER FRAME ASS’Y 1 1 12 2A105180 LABEL,CAUTION CONTACT GLASS 1 1 1

' 3 2A112080 FRONT WIRE,SCANNER 1 1 1' 4 2A112090 REAR WIRE,SCANNER 1 1 1' 5 2A193030 PARTS,LAMP SCANNER(SP) 1 1 1' 6 2A112111 MIRROR A 1 1 1' 7 2A112120 MIRROR B 2 2 2' 8 2A112160 CONTACT GLASS 1 1 1

9 2A112170 RETAINER,WIRE 2 2 210 2A112180 MIRROR FRAME A 1 1 111 2A112190 MIRROR FRAME B 1 1 112 2A112200 ADJUSTING PLATE B,MIRROR FRAME 1 1 113 2A112210 LEFT MOUNT,DF HINGE 1 1 114 2A112220 RIGHT MOUNT,DF HINGE 1 1 115 2A112230 COVER,INVERTER 1 1 116 2A112240 REFLECTOR,SCANNER 1 1 117 2A112250 SHAFT,SCANNER DRIVE 1 1 1

' 18 2A112260 GEAR Z30 1 1 1' 19 2A112270 GEAR Z23 1 1 1

20 2A112280 HOLDER,FFC 1 1 121 2A112290 GUIDE FFC2 1 1 122 2A112300 HOLDER,ISU WIRE 1 1 123 2A112310 MOUNT,SCANNER PI 1 1 124 2A112320 MOUNT,SCANNER MOTOR 1 1 1

' 25 2A112330 GEAR 27/13,SCANNER DRIVE 1 1 1' 26 2A112340 BELT S2M60,SCANNER 1 1 1

27 2A112350 STANDARD PLATE,SHADING 1 1 1' 28 2A112360 SPONGE,ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR 1 1 1

29 2A112370 MOUNT,DRIVE SHIFT (1510) 1 1 1' 30 2A112380 GEAR 13,DRIVE SHIFT (1510) 1 1 1' 31 2A112390 GEAR 25,DRIVE SHIFT (1510) 1 1 1

32 2A112400 LEVER,DRIVE SHIFT (1510) 1 1 1' 33 2A112410 FRICTION PLATE,DRIVE SHIFT 1 1 1

34 2A112420 COLLAR,JOINT (1510) 1 1 135 2A112430 SPRING,FRICTION PLATE 1 1 1

' 36 2A112441 LEFT ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL 1 1 1' 37 2A112451 REAR ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL 1 1 1

38 2A112470 GROUND PLATE,SCANNER MOTOR 1 1 139 2A112490 PULLEY B,MIRROR FRAME 2 2 240 2A112520 COVER,ISU 1 1 1

FIG. 8 OPTICAL SECTION

41 2A112530 WORK PLATE,SCANNER DRIVE 1 1 1' 42 2A193110 PARTS,MOTOR ISU(SP) 1 1 1

43 2A127780 WIRE,ISU 1 1 1' 44 2A128020 INVERTER PCB 1 1 1' 45 •M1651000 FUSE,250V 1,25A MINI 239 1 1 1

46 2AC12440 GROUND PLATE,INVERTER 1 1 147 2AR22160 SPRING,FIXING TENSION (1510) 1 1 1

' 48 2AV12450 SLIDER,SCANNER 8 8 8' 49 2AV12500 SPRING,SCANNER TENSION 2 2 2

50 2A112680 FRONT SEAL,SCANNER 1 1 151 2A806250 RING STOPPER (1510) 1 1 1

' 52 28107400 BEARING,688ZZNR 2 2 2' 53 29812291 CUSHION,CONTACT GLASS 9 9 9

54 33912150 PULLEY,WIRE 2 2 255 34806150 STOPPER 5 5 5 556 34806150 STOPPER 5 (1510) 2 2 2

' 57 35327400 SWITCH,FEED 2 2 2' 58 35411070 GEAR 21,IDLE 1 1 1' 59 35411070 GEAR 21,IDLE (1510) 1 1 1

60 35912060 PULLEY,SCANNER DRUM 2 2 261 35912210 SPRING,MIRROR HOLDER 6 6 6

' 62 62227070 SOLENOID B,FEED SHIFT (1510) 1 1 163 M2105020 NYLON CLAMP 4N,NK-4N 1 1 164 B4303080 TRIPLE SCREW M3X8(BLACK) (1510) 1 1 1

' 65 2A112130 CONTACT GLASS,DF 1 1 166 2A112670 SPONGE,SCANNER BASE 1 1 167 2A112640 SPRING,JOINT DRIVE (1510) 1 1 168 65027470 CORE,7-15X18 1 1 169 2A112620 LEFT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT 2 2 270 2A112630 RIGHT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT 1 1 1

' 71 2A112650 FRONT SEAL,SCANNER BASE 1 1 1' 72 2A112660 REAR SEAL,SCANNER BASE 1 1 1

73 18512340 GUIDE,SCANNER WIRE 2 2 2

2A1/2A2

– 18 –

FIG. 9 LASER SCANNER UNIT

2

1

3

6

4

7 9

8

5

HDG

– 19 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


' 1 2A168041 LSU ASS’Y 1 1 1' 2 •2A105131 LABEL,LASER UNIT 1 1 1

3 •2A113010 UNIT,LSU 1 1 1' 4 •2A113020 SPONGE 1,LSU 1 1 1' 5 •2A113050 SPONGE 4,LSU 1 1 1' 6 2A113030 SPONGE 2,LSU 1 1 1' 7 2A113040 SPONGE 3,LSU 1 1 1

8 2A127860 WIRE,LSU 1 1 19 33927580 CORE 9-20X32 1 1 1

FIG. 9 LASER SCANNER UNIT

2A1/2A2

– 20 –

FIG. 10 IMAGING UNIT (DEVELOPING SECTION)

20

13

32

38

30

23530

24

2621

2122

26

34

34

3639

39

27

16

2

4

25

15

29

35

17

33

18

6

11

10

7

1

19

12

3

14

89

37

2828

39

31

31

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HDB

HBI

HBH

HDB

HBI

KAM

KAL

BEA

– 21 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


1 2A109010 FRONT FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 12 2A109020 REAR FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 13 2A109030 FRONT BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 14 2A109040 REAR BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 15 2A114010 MAGNET,DEVELOPING 1 1 16 2A114021 HOUSING,DEVELOPING 1 1 17 2A114030 PADDLE,DEVELOPING 1 1 18 2A114040 LEFT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING 1 1 19 2A114050 RIGHT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING 1 1 1

10 2A114060 MOUNT,DOCTOR BLADE 1 1 111 2A114070 DOCTOR BLADE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1

' 12 2A114080 UPPER SEAL,DEVELOPING 1 1 113 2A114090 FRONT BUSHING,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 114 2A114100 RETAINER,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1

' 15 2A114110 GEAR 16,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1' 16 2A114120 GEAR 17,IDLE 1 1 1' 17 2A114130 RIGHT GEAR 26,SPIRAL 1 1 1' 18 2A114161 REAR SPONGE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1' 19 2A114170 UPPER SPONGE,DEVELOPING SEAL 1 1 1' 20 2A114181 FRONT SPONGE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1' 21 2A114190 SEAL,DEVELOPING 2 2 2

22 2A114200 UPPER TERMINAL,DEVELOPING SEAL 1 1 123 2A114260 FRONT SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 124 2A114270 REAR SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1

' 25 2A114280 GEAR 22,PADDLE 1 1 1' 26 2A114290 SPONGE,DEVELOPING 2 2 2' 27 2A114300 BUSHING 6-16,DEVELOPING 3 3 3' 28 2A114311 BUSHING 6-21,DEVELOPING 2 2 2' 29 2A114320 GEAR 24,DEVELOPING 1 1 1' 30 2A114330 INNER SPONGE,DEVELOPING 2 2 2

31 2A114360 SPACER,DEVELOPING 2 2 232 2A127850 JUNCTION WIRING,DEVELOPING 1 1 1

' 33 2AR14160 SPACER,TONER SENSOR 1 1 1' 34 2AR14300 LOWER FILM,DEVELOPING 2 2 2

35 2A806250 RING STOPPER 1 1 1' 36 45592554 BEARING 688ADD 1 1 1' 37 49028113 BUSHING 6-19,DEV.UNIT 1 1 1' 38 33914190 TONER SENSOR 1 1 1

39 34806150 STOPPER 5 7 7 7

FIG. 10 IMAGING UNIT (DEVELOPING SECTION)

2A1/2A2

– 22 –

FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT (CLEANING SECTION)

5

16

25

21

10

9

6

19

18

8

4

17

18

27

26

11

12

1

3

2

13

15

724

24

20

23

22

14

28

HDB

HDB

HBH

HDB

HBH

HDB

KKG

HBH

– 23 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 11 IMAGING UNIT (CLEANING SECTION)

' 1 2A182010 SET,DRUM(NEUTRAL) 1 1 12 2A108021 SHAFT,DRUM 1 1 13 2A108030 GROUND PLATE,DRUM 1 1 1

' 4 34918090 GEAR 19,DISPOSAL 1 1 15 2A118014 HOUSING,CLEANING 1 1 16 2A118020 SPIRAL,CLEANING 1 1 17 2A118050 MOUNT,BLADE 1 1 1

' 8 2A193040 PARTS,BLADE CLEANING LOWER(SP) 1 1 19 2A118070 SHUTTER,DISPOSAL 1 1 1

10 2A118080 SPRING,SHUTTER 1 1 1' 11 2A118101 FRONT SPONGE,CLEANING 1 1 1' 12 2A118111 REAR SPONGE,CLEANING 1 1 1

13 2A118140 SPRING,THRUST 1 1 1' 14 2A118150 GEAR 25,THRUST 1 1 1

15 2A118160 SPRING,BLADE 1 1 1' 16 2A118190 INNER SPONGE,CLEANING 1 1 1

17 2A118200 INNER FILM,CLEANING 1 1 1' 18 2A118261 UPPER SPONGE,CLEANING 2 2 2

19 2A118280 PIPE,SPIRAL 1 1 1' 20 2A193050 PARTS,BLADE CLEANING B(SP) 1 1 1' 21 2A118300 CLAW,DRUM SEPARATION 3 3 3' 22 2A118312 FRONT SPONGE,BLADE 1 1 1' 23 2A118323 REAR SPONGE,BLADE 1 1 1' 24 2A118350 BUSHING,BLADE MOUNT 2 2 2' 25 2A118370 PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION 3 3 3' 26 2A118380 FRONT SEAL K,CLEANING 1 1 1' 27 2A118390 REAR SEAL K,CLEANING 1 1 1' 28 2A168010 MAIN CHARGER ASS’Y 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 24 –

FIG. 12 FIXING SECTION

9

10

18

15

26

2

24

29

30

122711

27

13

24 30

3

5

7

5

4

16

16

17

28

25

6 31

22

21

14

23

192025

18

HBI

HDB

HBI

HBH

HDB

HDG

HDB

NBA

NBA

NBA

HDB

– 25 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 12 FIXING SECTION

' 1 2A193060 PARTS,ROLLER HEAT(SP) 1 1 1' 2 2A193070 PARTS,ROLLER PRESS(SP) 1 1 1' 3 2A193080 PARTS,HEATER FIXING 120(SP) 1' 3 2A193090 PARTS,HEATER FIXING 240(SP) 1 1' 4 2A120050 GEAR,HEAT ROLLER 1 1 1' 5 2A120060 BUSHING,HEAT ROLLER 2 2 2' 6 2A120071 SEPARATION CLAW,HEAT ROLLER 4 4 4' 7 2A120080 THERMISTOR,FIXING 1 1 1

8 2A120090 RIGHT HOUSING,FIXING 1 1 19 2A120100 LEFT HOUSING,FIXING 1 1 1

10 2A120110 UPPER GUIDE,FIXING 1 1 111 2A120120 LOWER GUIDE,FIXING 1 1 1

' 12 2A120130 FRONT LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE 1 1 1' 13 2A120140 REAR LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE 1 1 1

14 2A120150 FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER 1 1 115 2A120160 REAR SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER 1 1 116 2A120170 HOLDER,HEAT ROLLER 2 2 2

' 17 2A120240 GEAR 44,FIXING IDLE 1 1 1' 18 2A120250 FRONT COVER,FIXING 1 1 1' 19 2A121010 ROLLER,EJECT 1 1 1' 20 2A121030 ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH 1 1 1' 21 2A121040 SPRING,EJECT SWITCH 1 1 1' 22 2A127050 SWITCH,PHOT0 INTERRUPTOR 1 1 1

23 2A127550 JUNCTION WIRING,EJECT SWITCH 1 1 1' 24 2A120260 SPRING,PRESS ROLLER 2 2 2

25 2A806030 BUSH FEED 2 2 2' 26 36220210 LEFT THERMOSTAT,FIXING 1 1 1' 27 63820190 BEARING, FIXING UNIT 2 2 2

28 65014160 RIGHT GEAR 25,TONER SUPPLY 1 1 129 65016080 STOP RING E3 1 1 130 68820280 HOLDER,BEARING 2 2 2

' 31 75720240 SPRING SEPARATION CLAW 4 4 4

2A1/2A2

– 26 –

FIG. 13 DRIVING SECTION

18

10

2

1

28

2425

11

3130

29

3

27

433

5

6

9

34

34

26

28

20

12

1532

28

28

19

13

28

28

28

14

1721

16

22

35

7

23

8

36

HDB

HBI

HDB

HDB

BHIBHI

HDB HBH

HBH

HBH

– 27 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 13 DRIVING SECTION

' 1 2A106090 GEAR 32,REGISTRATION CLUTCH 1 1 12 2A106100 GROUND PLATE,REGISTRATION ROLLER 1 1 13 2A115010 HOUSING,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1 14 2A115020 MOUNT,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1 15 2A115030 GEAR 24A,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 15 2A115050 GEAR 24B,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 16 2A115040 GEAR 18A,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 16 2A115060 GEAR 18B,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1

' 7 2AV27330 CLUTCH,PAPER FEED 1 1 18 34922570 GEAR 23,DEVELOPING 1 1 1

' 9 2A115070 GEAR,TONER MOTOR 1 1 1' 10 2A193100 PARTS,MOTOR MAIN(SP) 1 1 1' 11 2A122020 GEAR 53,DRUM DRIVE 1 1 1' 12 2A122030 GEAR 28/20,COUPLER 1 1 1' 13 2A122040 GEAR 97/25 1 1 1' 14 2A122050 GEAR 67/30 1 1 1

15 2A122060 GEAR 45/40 1 1 116 2A122080 GEAR 26/20 1 1 1

' 17 2A122100 COUPLING,DEVELOPING DRIVE 1 1 118 2A122110 MOUNT,MACHINE DRIVE 1 1 119 2A122150 GEAR 23/16 1 1 120 2A122190 SPRING,DRUM COUPLING 1 1 121 2A122200 SPRING,DEVELOPING COUPLING 1 1 122 2A122120 MOUNT,PAPER FEED DRIVE 1 1 123 2A122160 GEAR 37/21 1 1 1

' 24 2A127080 CLUTCH,REGISTRATION 1 1 125 2A806250 RING STOPPER 1 1 126 29822230 GEAR 16T,PF IDLE 1 1 1

' 27 33915190 TONER MOTOR 1 1 128 34806150 STOPPER 5 7 7 7

' 29 35322190 GEAR 28,FIXING COUPLER 1 1 130 35322200 COUPLER,FIXING DRIVE 1 1 131 35322210 SPRING,FIXING COUPLER 1 1 132 63822220 GEAR,41 1 1 133 71804400 MAGNET,LOWER FRONT COVER 1 1 134 73818100 SPRING, BLADE THRUST 2 2 235 2A122180 GEAR 32/18 1 1 136 2A102510 LEFT HPLDER,CASETTE 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 28 –

FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

BIB

HAUHDB

GEA

HDBHBH

HBH

BIA

HBH

HBH

HBH

BBK

HBH

BBK

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HBH

HAU

HBH

BBB

4243

47

44

40

48 46 2

4 1112

3

32

38

23

24

6

25

15

27 20

45

35

36

37 34

1

30

29

26

41

28

22

21

22

3133

39

7

89

10

16

13

14

5

17

18

19

19

230V / 240V

120V

– 29 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

' 1 2A101022 MAIN PCB ASS’Y (1510) 1 1' 1 2A101060 MAIN PCB ASS’Y(F C C) (1510) 1' 1 2A201020 MAIN PCB ASS’Y (1810) 1 1' 1 2A201030 MAIN PCB ASS’Y(F C C) (1810) 1

2 2A101050 NOISE FILTER ASS’Y(230) 1 13 •L0223130 ROUND TYPE TERMINAL,M4,LRT-51T-4FE 1 14 •63127120 NOISE FILTER,10A 1 1

' 5 35927420 SWITCH,SIZE 1 1 16 65027470 CORE,7-15X18 1 1 1

' 7 2A193010 PARTS,POWER SOURCE ASS’Y 120(SP) 1' 7 2A193020 PARTS,POWER SOURCE ASS’Y 230(SP) 1 1

8 •2A126160 MOUNT,POWER SOURCE PCB 1' 9 •2A127070 SWITCH,MAIN 1

10 •2A128051 POWER SOURCE PCB 120 110 •2A128061 POWER SOURCE PCB 230 1 1

' 11 ••M1661000 FUSE 15A,314015 1' 11 ••M1756010 FUSE S506-6,3A(BUSSMANN) 1 1' 12 ••M1655030 FUSE,237005(LITTEL) 1' 12 ••M1753010 FUSE S506-3,15A(BUSSMANN) 1 1

13 2AL27090 POWER CORD(USA) 114 2AN27360 POWER CORD(230) 1 115 M2607010 BINDING BAND,PLT1M 1 1 1

' 16 2A127050 SWITCH,PHOTO INTERRUPTOR 1 1 117 2A127830 JUNCTION WIRING,REGISTRATION SW 1 1 118 2A126030 SHIELD,MEMORY BOARD (1510) 1 1 119 2A126130 PIN,OPTION 2 2 220 2A126150 COVER PCB,SHIELD 1 1 121 2AV26220 LOWER LID,SHIELD 1 1 122 3BH26030 PIN,OPTION 2 2 223 2A127791 WIRE,INLET 123 2A127601 WIRE,INLET(230) 1 124 2A127820 WIRE,FIXING HEATER 1 1 125 2A126010 MOUNT,MAIN PCB 1 1 126 2A126020 SHIELD,PCB 1 1 127 2A126060 GUIDE,MEMORY BOARD 1 1 128 2A126070 GUIDE,NETWORK BOARD 1 1 129 2A126080 GUIDE,PRINTER BOARD 1 1 130 2A127500 WIRE,ISU 1 1 131 2A127510 LEFT WIRE 1 1 132 2A127521 FRONT WIRE 1 1 1

' 33 2A193120 PARTS,PCB HIGH VOLTAGE(SP) 1 1 1' 34 2A201010 MEMORY PCB ASS’Y (1810) 1 1 1

35 •2A226010 MOUNT,MEMORY BOARD (1810) 1 1 136 •2A228010 MEMORY PCB (1810) 1 1 1

' 37 2A228020 IC DIMM (1810) 1 1 138 2A127800 WIRE,RELAY SHORT CIRCUIT 1 1 1

' 39 2A123010 FAN,COOLING 1 1 140 2A102130 MOUNT,INLET 140 2A102500 MOUNT,INLET(230) 1 141 2A102120 GROUND PLATE,INLET 1 1 142 2A102140 WORK PLATE,SAFETY SWITCH 1 1 143 2A102150 SPRING,SAFETY SWITCH 1 1 1

' 44 2A127040 SWITCH,INTERLOCK 1 1 145 2A102520 RIGHT HOLDER.CASSETTE 1 1 146 2A127060 INLET 3P,POWER SOURCE 147 63511220 STOP RING,4 1 1 1

' 48 2A327010 SENSOR,HUMIDITY 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 30 –

FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT

17

3

2

4

68

5

HDB

BHI

HBH

HBI

– 31 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 15 OPERATION UNIT

' 1 2A104063 TRAY,EJECT 1 1 1' 2 2A125021 SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(INCH) 1' 2 2A125061 SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(METRIC) 1' 2 2A125071 SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(MAP) 1' 3 2A125030 SHEET B,OPERATION UNIT 1 1 1' 4 2A125040 SHEET,DUST SHIELD 1 1 1' 5 2A125050 LID,OPERATION UNIT 1 1 1' 6 2A193130 PARTS,PCB OPERATION UNIT(SP) 1 1 1' 7 2A104120 WIND SHIELD PLATE,EJECT TRAY 1 1 1

8 2A102160 AUXILIARY PLATE,EJECT TRAY 1 1 1

2A1/2A2

– 32 –

FIG. 16 ACCESSORIES & OPTION

BBK

3

4

5

1

2

1114

12

13

67

8

9

10

16

15

– 33 –

2A1/2A2





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 16 ACCESSORIES & OPTION

1 2A160010 MEMORY PCB ASS’Y OP (1510) 1 1 1' 2 •2A201010 MEMORY PCB ASS’Y (1510) 1 1 1

3 ••2A226010 MOUNT,MEMORY BOARD (1510) 1 1 14 ••2A228010 MEMORY PCB (1510) 1 1 1

' 5 •2A228020 IC DIMM (1510) 1 1 16 2A173800 TONER DISPOSAL TANK ASS’Y 1 1 17 •2A173810 TANK,TONER DISPOSAL 1 1 18 •2A173820 SHIELD,TONER DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 19 •2A173830 TAPE,TONER DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1

10 •36505111 LABEL,TONER DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1' 11 2AV68030 SPECIAL TOOL MEMORY PCB 1 1 1' 12 2A168050 IC,ROM MAIN PCB 1 1 1' 13 35968010 FLASH JIG PCB 1 1 1' 14 2A168070 SHEET,SCANNER ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1' 15 2A168080 SPECIAL TOOL,FRAME RETAINING 1 1 1' 16 NAS09010 BACKUP RAM M48Z35Y-70PC 1 1 1

– 34 –

2A1/2A2


Part. No.SP Description Fig. No.Quantity

230V120V 240VPart. No.SP Description Fig. No.

Quantity

230V120V 240V

18512340 GUIDE,SCANNER WIRE 2 2 2 819507011 CASSETTE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 319507040 BASE,CASSETTE 1 1 1 319507050 LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE 1 1 1 319507080 REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC) 2 2 319512210 RETAINING PIN,MIRROR FRAME 1 1 1 12AC12440 GROUND PLATE,INVERTER 1 1 1 82AL27090 POWER CORD(USA) 1 142AN27360 POWER CORD(230) 1 1 14

' 2AR14160 SPACER,TONER SENSOR 1 1 1 10' 2AR14300 LOWER FILM,DEVELOPING 2 2 2 10

2AR17080 COLLAR,TRANSFER ROLLER 2 2 2 42AR22160 SPRING,FIXING TENSION 1 1 1 8

' 2AV12450 SLIDER,SCANNER 8 8 8 8' 2AV12500 SPRING,SCANNER TENSION 2 2 2 8

2AV26220 LOWER LID,SHIELD 1 1 1 14' 2AV27330 CLUTCH,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 13' 2AV27340 CLUTCH,BYPASS 1 1 1 2' 2AV68030 SPECIAL TOOL MEMORY PCB 1 1 1 16

2A005060 LABEL,HIGH VOLTAGE CAUTION(EUR) 1 1 1 12A100010 SCANNER FRAME ASS’Y 1 1 1 8

' 2A101022 MAIN PCB ASS’Y 1 1 142A101050 NOISE FILTER ASS’Y(230) 1 1 14

' 2A101060 MAIN PCB ASS’Y(F C C) 1 142A102010 BASE 1 1 1 22A102021 FRAME IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1 22A102030 RIGHT FRAME 1 1 1 22A102090 LEFT RAIL,CASSETTE 1 1 1 2

' 2A102100 HANDLE,JAM RELEASE 1 1 1 42A102110 FULCRUM PIN,CONVEYING 1 1 1 42A102120 GROUND PLATE,INLET 1 1 1 142A102130 MOUNT,INLET 1 142A102140 WORK PLATE,SAFETY SWITCH 1 1 1 142A102150 SPRING,SAFETY SWITCH 1 1 1 142A102160 AUXILIARY PLATE,EJECT TRAY 1 1 1 152A102500 MOUNT,INLET(230) 1 1 142A102510 LEFT HPLDER,CASETTE 1 1 1 132A102520 RIGHT HOLDER.CASSETTE 1 1 1 14

' 2A104012 FRONT COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A104021 UPPER FRONT COVER 1 1 1 1

INDEX

' 2A104032 RIGHT COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A104041 LEFT COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A104052 COVER,CONVEYING 1 1 1 4' 2A104063 TRAY,EJECT 1 1 1 15' 2A104071 REAR COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A104080 COVER,DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1 1' 2A104090 COVER,PRINTER BOARD 1 1 1 1' 2A104100 RIGHT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A104110 LEFT FULCRUM PLATE,FRONT COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A104120 WIND SHIELD PLATE,EJECT TRAY 1 1 1 15' 2A105080 LABEL,HIGH TEMPERATURE CAUTION 1 1 1 4' 2A105091 LABEL,CONVEYING JAM 1 1 1 1' 2A105131 LABEL,LASER UNIT 1 1 1 9' 2A105140 LABEL,CARTRIDGE OPERATION 1 1 1 1' 2A105160 LABEL,DF CAUTION 1 1 1 1

2A105180 LABEL,CAUTION CONTACT GLASS 1 1 1 8' 2A106010 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2 2 2 2' 2A106020 LEFT ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 4' 2A106031 RIGHT ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 2

2A106040 SHAFT,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 22A106060 SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING 1 1 1 4

' 2A106071 ACTUATOR,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 2' 2A106081 SPRING,REGISTRATION ACTUATOR 1 1 1 2' 2A106090 GEAR 32,REGISTRATION CLUTCH 1 1 1 13

2A106100 GROUND PLATE,REGISTRATION ROLLER 1 1 1 132A106120 FRONT SPRING,REGISTRATION PRESSING 1 1 1 4

' 2A106150 LEFT GEAR 14,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 4' 2A106160 RIGHT GEAR 15,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 2' 2A106170 PULLEY B,PAPER FEED 2 2 2 2

2A106180 SHAFT,PAPER FEED CL 1 1 1 22A106191 SUPPORT PLATE,GUIDE PULLEY 2 2 2 2

' 2A106200 RIGHT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION 2 2 2 2' 2A106210 LEFT GUIDE FILM,REGISTRATION ADMISSION 2 2 2 4' 2A106220 GUIDE FILM,PAPER FEED CONFLUENCE 1 1 1 2' 2A106230 GUIDE FILM,PRIMARY PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 2A106240 FRONT SHEET,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 2' 2A106510 PULLEY,BYPASS 1 1 1 2' 2A106530 UPPER GUIDE,BYPASS 1 1 1 2

2A106540 GUIDE,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1 2' 2A106550 HOLDER,BYPASS PAD 1 1 1 2

2A1/2A2

– 35 –




Quantity

230V120V 240V

' 2A106560 CAM,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1 2' 2A106570 STOPPER,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1 2' 2A106581 SPRING,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1 2' 2A106590 SPRING,BYPASS PAD 1 1 1 2' 2A106680 PAD,BYPASS 1 1 1 2

2A106690 SHAFT,BYPASS 1 1 1 22A106700 GROUND PLATE,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1 2

' 2A106721 GUIDE,BYPASS PAD 1 1 1 2' 2A106730 FRONT BUSHING,BYPASS 1 1 1 2

2A106740 VIBRATION INSULATOR,PAD HOLDER 1 1 1 2' 2A106760 FRICTION PLATE C,BYPASS LIFT 1 1 1 2

2A106770 SHEET,PAD HOLDER 1 1 1 2' 2A106810 TABLE,BYPASS 1 1 1 4' 2A106820 COVER,BYPASS TABLE 1 1 1 4

2A106831 FRONT CURSOR,BYPASS 1 1 1 42A106841 REAR CURSOR,BYPASS 1 1 1 4

' 2A107011 COVER,CASSETTE 1 1 1 32A107020 GROUND PLATE,CASSETTE 1 1 1 32A107030 SPRING,CASSETTE 2 2 2 3

' 2A107040 SLIDER,CASSETTE 2 2 2 2' 2A107050 FRONT CLAW CASSETTE 1 1 1 3' 2A107060 FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE 2 2 2 3

2A108021 SHAFT,DRUM 1 1 1 112A108030 GROUND PLATE,DRUM 1 1 1 112A109010 FRONT FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1 102A109020 REAR FRAME,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1 102A109030 FRONT BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1 102A109040 REAR BUSHING,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1 102A110150 LIGHT SHIELD,CLEANING LAMP 1 1 1 2

' 2A112080 FRONT WIRE,SCANNER 1 1 1 8' 2A112090 REAR WIRE,SCANNER 1 1 1 8' 2A112111 MIRROR A 1 1 1 8' 2A112120 MIRROR B 2 2 2 8' 2A112130 CONTACT GLASS,DF 1 1 1 8' 2A112160 CONTACT GLASS 1 1 1 8

2A112170 RETAINER,WIRE 2 2 2 82A112180 MIRROR FRAME A 1 1 1 82A112190 MIRROR FRAME B 1 1 1 82A112200 ADJUSTING PLATE B,MIRROR FRAME 1 1 1 82A112210 LEFT MOUNT,DF HINGE 1 1 1 8

2A112220 RIGHT MOUNT,DF HINGE 1 1 1 82A112230 COVER,INVERTER 1 1 1 82A112240 REFLECTOR,SCANNER 1 1 1 82A112250 SHAFT,SCANNER DRIVE 1 1 1 8

' 2A112260 GEAR Z30 1 1 1 8' 2A112270 GEAR Z23 1 1 1 8

2A112280 HOLDER,FFC 1 1 1 82A112290 GUIDE FFC2 1 1 1 82A112300 HOLDER,ISU WIRE 1 1 1 82A112310 MOUNT,SCANNER PI 1 1 1 82A112320 MOUNT,SCANNER MOTOR 1 1 1 8

' 2A112330 GEAR 27/13,SCANNER DRIVE 1 1 1 8' 2A112340 BELT S2M60,SCANNER 1 1 1 8

2A112350 STANDARD PLATE,SHADING 1 1 1 8' 2A112360 SPONGE,ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR 1 1 1 8

2A112370 MOUNT,DRIVE SHIFT 1 1 1 8' 2A112380 GEAR 13,DRIVE SHIFT 1 1 1 8' 2A112390 GEAR 25,DRIVE SHIFT 1 1 1 8

2A112400 LEVER,DRIVE SHIFT 1 1 1 8' 2A112410 FRICTION PLATE,DRIVE SHIFT 1 1 1 8

2A112420 COLLAR,JOINT 1 1 1 82A112430 SPRING,FRICTION PLATE 1 1 1 8

' 2A112441 LEFT ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL 1 1 1 8' 2A112451 REAR ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR,ORIGINAL 1 1 1 8

2A112470 GROUND PLATE,SCANNER MOTOR 1 1 1 82A112490 PULLEY B,MIRROR FRAME 2 2 2 82A112520 COVER,ISU 1 1 1 82A112530 WORK PLATE,SCANNER DRIVE 1 1 1 82A112620 LEFT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT 2 2 2 82A112630 RIGHT GROUND PLATE,ISU MOUNT 1 1 1 82A112640 SPRING,JOINT DRIVE 1 1 1 8

' 2A112650 FRONT SEAL,SCANNER BASE 1 1 1 8' 2A112660 REAR SEAL,SCANNER BASE 1 1 1 8

2A112670 SPONGE,SCANNER BASE 1 1 1 82A112680 FRONT SEAL,SCANNER 1 1 1 82A112700 RETAINING PIN A,MIRROR FRAME 1 1 1 12A113010 UNIT,LSU 1 1 1 9

' 2A113020 SPONGE 1,LSU 1 1 1 9' 2A113030 SPONGE 2,LSU 1 1 1 9' 2A113040 SPONGE 3,LSU 1 1 1 9

– 36 –

2A1/2A2




Quantity

230V120V 240V

' 2A113050 SPONGE 4,LSU 1 1 1 92A114010 MAGNET,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A114021 HOUSING,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A114030 PADDLE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A114040 LEFT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A114050 RIGHT SPIRAL,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A114060 MOUNT,DOCTOR BLADE 1 1 1 102A114070 DOCTOR BLADE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 10

' 2A114080 UPPER SEAL,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A114090 FRONT BUSHING,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1 102A114100 RETAINER,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1 10

' 2A114110 GEAR 16,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1 10' 2A114120 GEAR 17,IDLE 1 1 1 10' 2A114130 RIGHT GEAR 26,SPIRAL 1 1 1 10' 2A114161 REAR SPONGE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 10' 2A114170 UPPER SPONGE,DEVELOPING SEAL 1 1 1 10' 2A114181 FRONT SPONGE,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 10' 2A114190 SEAL,DEVELOPING 2 2 2 10

2A114200 UPPER TERMINAL,DEVELOPING SEAL 1 1 1 102A114260 FRONT SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1 102A114270 REAR SEAL,MAGNET ROLLER 1 1 1 10

' 2A114280 GEAR 22,PADDLE 1 1 1 10' 2A114290 SPONGE,DEVELOPING 2 2 2 10' 2A114300 BUSHING 6-16,DEVELOPING 3 3 3 10' 2A114311 BUSHING 6-21,DEVELOPING 2 2 2 10' 2A114320 GEAR 24,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 10' 2A114330 INNER SPONGE,DEVELOPING 2 2 2 10

2A114340 HOLDER,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 22A114360 SPACER,DEVELOPING 2 2 2 102A115010 HOUSING,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1 1 132A115020 MOUNT,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1 1 132A115030 GEAR 24A,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 132A115040 GEAR 18A,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 132A115050 GEAR 24B,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1 132A115060 GEAR 18B,CARTRIDGE DRIVE 1 1 13

' 2A115070 GEAR,TONER MOTOR 1 1 1 13' 2A116010 ROLLER,TRANSFER 1 4

2A116020 FRONT GUIDE,TRANSFER 1 1 1 4' 2A116040 PULLEY,TRANSFER 2 2 2 4

2A116050 REAR GUIDE TRANSFER 1 1 1 4

2A116060 HOUSING,CONVEYING 1 1 1 42A116070 SPRING,CONVEYING PRESSURE 2 2 2 42A116080 FRONT SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER 1 1 1 42A116090 REAR SPRING,TRANSFER ROLLER 1 1 1 42A116100 SHAFT,HOOK 1 1 1 4

' 2A116111 FRONT BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE 2 2 2 4' 2A116121 REAR BUSHING,TRANSFER PRESSURE 2 2 2 4

2A116130 HOLDER,PRESSURE SPRING 3 3 3 42A116140 TERMINAL,TRANSFER GUIDE 1 1 1 42A116150 HOLDER,TRANSFER PRESSURE SPRING 1 1 1 42A116160 SPRING,CONVEYING RELEASE 1 1 1 4

' 2A116171 STATIC ELIMINATOR,TRANSFER 1 1 1 4' 2A116180 BUSHING,TRANSFER 2 2 2 4' 2A116190 GEAR,TRANSFER 1 1 1 4' 2A116200 ROLLER,TRANSFER,METRIC 1 1 4' 2A116210 FRONT SHEET,TRANSFER GUIDE 1 1 1 4' 2A116220 CLEANER,TRANSFER 1 1 1 4' 2A116240 SEAL B,TRANSFER ROLLER 2 2 2 4

2A118014 HOUSING,CLEANING 1 1 1 112A118020 SPIRAL,CLEANING 1 1 1 112A118050 MOUNT,BLADE 1 1 1 112A118070 SHUTTER,DISPOSAL 1 1 1 112A118080 SPRING,SHUTTER 1 1 1 11

' 2A118101 FRONT SPONGE,CLEANING 1 1 1 11' 2A118111 REAR SPONGE,CLEANING 1 1 1 11

2A118140 SPRING,THRUST 1 1 1 11' 2A118150 GEAR 25,THRUST 1 1 1 11

2A118160 SPRING,BLADE 1 1 1 11' 2A118190 INNER SPONGE,CLEANING 1 1 1 11

2A118200 INNER FILM,CLEANING 1 1 1 112A118240 DETECTION PLATE,DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1 12A118250 SPRING,TANK DETECTION 1 1 1 1

' 2A118261 UPPER SPONGE,CLEANING 2 2 2 112A118280 PIPE,SPIRAL 1 1 1 11

' 2A118300 CLAW,DRUM SEPARATION 3 3 3 11' 2A118312 FRONT SPONGE,BLADE 1 1 1 11' 2A118323 REAR SPONGE,BLADE 1 1 1 11' 2A118350 BUSHING,BLADE MOUNT 2 2 2 11' 2A118370 PULLEY,DRUM SEPARATION 3 3 3 11' 2A118380 FRONT SEAL K,CLEANING 1 1 1 11

2A1/2A2

– 37 –




Quantity

230V120V 240V

' 2A118390 REAR SEAL K,CLEANING 1 1 1 11' 2A120050 GEAR,HEAT ROLLER 1 1 1 12' 2A120060 BUSHING,HEAT ROLLER 2 2 2 12' 2A120071 SEPARATION CLAW,HEAT ROLLER 4 4 4 12' 2A120080 THERMISTOR,FIXING 1 1 1 12

2A120090 RIGHT HOUSING,FIXING 1 1 1 122A120100 LEFT HOUSING,FIXING 1 1 1 122A120110 UPPER GUIDE,FIXING 1 1 1 122A120120 LOWER GUIDE,FIXING 1 1 1 12

' 2A120130 FRONT LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE 1 1 1 12' 2A120140 REAR LEVER,FIXING PRESSURE RELEASE 1 1 1 12

2A120150 FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER 1 1 1 122A120160 REAR SUPPORT PLATE,FIXING HEATER 1 1 1 122A120170 HOLDER,HEAT ROLLER 2 2 2 12

' 2A120240 GEAR 44,FIXING IDLE 1 1 1 12' 2A120250 FRONT COVER,FIXING 1 1 1 12' 2A120260 SPRING,PRESS ROLLER 2 2 2 12' 2A121010 ROLLER,EJECT 1 1 1 12

2A121020 PLATE SPRING,EJECT 2 2 2 2' 2A121030 ACTUATOR,EJECT SWITCH 1 1 1 12' 2A121040 SPRING,EJECT SWITCH 1 1 1 12' 2A121050 STATIC ELIMINATOR,EJECT 1 1 1 2

2A121060 GROUND PLATE,EJECT 1 1 1 2' 2A122020 GEAR 53,DRUM DRIVE 1 1 1 13' 2A122030 GEAR 28/20,COUPLER 1 1 1 13' 2A122040 GEAR 97/25 1 1 1 13' 2A122050 GEAR 67/30 1 1 1 13

2A122060 GEAR 45/40 1 1 1 132A122080 GEAR 26/20 1 1 1 13

' 2A122100 COUPLING,DEVELOPING DRIVE 1 1 1 132A122110 MOUNT,MACHINE DRIVE 1 1 1 132A122120 MOUNT,PAPER FEED DRIVE 1 1 1 132A122150 GEAR 23/16 1 1 1 132A122160 GEAR 37/21 1 1 1 132A122180 GEAR 32/18 1 1 1 132A122190 SPRING,DRUM COUPLING 1 1 1 132A122200 SPRING,DEVELOPING COUPLING 1 1 1 13

' 2A123010 FAN,COOLING 1 1 1 14' 2A125021 SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(INCH) 1 15' 2A125030 SHEET B,OPERATION UNIT 1 1 1 15

' 2A125040 SHEET,DUST SHIELD 1 1 1 15' 2A125050 LID,OPERATION UNIT 1 1 1 15' 2A125061 SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(METRIC) 1 15' 2A125071 SHEET A,OPERATION UNIT(MAP) 1 15

2A126010 MOUNT,MAIN PCB 1 1 1 142A126020 SHIELD,PCB 1 1 1 142A126030 SHIELD,MEMORY BOARD 1 1 1 142A126060 GUIDE,MEMORY BOARD 1 1 1 142A126070 GUIDE,NETWORK BOARD 1 1 1 142A126080 GUIDE,PRINTER BOARD 1 1 1 142A126090 GROUND PLATE,IMAGE FORMATION 1 1 1 22A126130 PIN,OPTION 2 2 2 142A126150 COVER PCB,SHIELD 1 1 1 142A126160 MOUNT,POWER SOURCE PCB 1 14

' 2A127010 LAMP,CLEANING 1 1 1 2' 2A127040 SWITCH,INTERLOCK 1 1 1 14' 2A127050 SWITCH,PHOTO INTERRUPTOR 6 6 6 5,7,12,14

2A127060 INLET 3P,POWER SOURCE 1 14' 2A127070 SWITCH,MAIN 1 14' 2A127080 CLUTCH,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 13

2A127500 WIRE,ISU 1 1 1 142A127510 LEFT WIRE 1 1 1 142A127521 FRONT WIRE 1 1 1 142A127550 JUNCTION WIRING,EJECT SWITCH 1 1 1 122A127601 WIRE,INLET(230) 1 1 142A127780 WIRE,ISU 1 1 1 82A127791 WIRE,INLET 1 142A127800 WIRE,RELAY SHORT CIRCUIT 1 1 1 142A127820 WIRE,FIXING HEATER 1 1 1 142A127830 JUNCTION WIRING,REGISTRATION SW 1 1 1 142A127850 JUNCTION WIRING,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 102A127860 WIRE,LSU 1 1 1 92A127890 TERMINAL,MAIN CHARGER JUNCTION 1 1 1 22A127900 TERMINAL,GRID JUNCTION 1 1 1 22A127910 TERMINAL,TRANSFER JUNCTION 1 1 1 2

' 2A128020 INVERTER PCB 1 1 1 82A128051 POWER SOURCE PCB 120 1 142A128061 POWER SOURCE PCB 230 1 1 142A160010 MEMORY PCB ASS’Y OP 1 1 1 16

' 2A168010 MAIN CHARGER ASS’Y 1 1 1 11

– 38 –

2A1/2A2




Quantity

230V120V 240V

' 2A168034 TRANSFER ROLLER ASS’Y 1 4' 2A168041 LSU ASS’Y 1 1 1 9' 2A168050 IC,ROM MAIN PCB 1 1 1 16' 2A168064 TRANSFER ROLLER ASS’Y(METRIC) 1 1 4' 2A168070 SHEET,SCANNER ADJUSTMENT 1 1 1 16' 2A168080 SPECIAL TOOL,FRAME RETAINING 1 1 1 16

2A173800 TONER DISPOSAL TANK ASS’Y 1 1 1 162A173810 TANK,TONER DISPOSAL 1 1 1 162A173820 SHIELD,TONER DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1 162A173830 TAPE,TONER DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1 16

' 2A182010 SET,DRUM(NEUTRAL) 1 1 1 11' 2A193010 PARTS,POWER SOURCE ASS’Y 120(SP) 1 14' 2A193020 PARTS,POWER SOURCE ASS’Y 230(SP) 1 1 14' 2A193030 PARTS,LAMP SCANNER(SP) 1 1 1 8' 2A193040 PARTS,BLADE CLEANING LOWER(SP) 1 1 1 11' 2A193050 PARTS,BLADE CLEANING B(SP) 1 1 1 11' 2A193060 PARTS,ROLLER HEAT(SP) 1 1 1 12' 2A193070 PARTS,ROLLER PRESS(SP) 1 1 1 12' 2A193080 PARTS,HEATER FIXING 120(SP) 1 12' 2A193090 PARTS,HEATER FIXING 240(SP) 1 1 12' 2A193100 PARTS,MOTOR MAIN(SP) 1 1 1 13' 2A193110 PARTS,MOTOR ISU(SP) 1 1 1 8' 2A193120 PARTS,PCB HIGH VOLTAGE(SP) 1 1 1 14' 2A193130 PARTS,PCB OPERATION UNIT(SP) 1 1 1 15' 2A201010 MEMORY PCB ASS’Y 2 2 2 14,16' 2A201020 MAIN PCB ASS’Y 1 1 14' 2A201030 MAIN PCB ASS’Y(F C C) 1 14' 2A204012 FRONT COVER 1 1 1 1' 2A204021 REAR COVER 1 1 1 1

2A226010 MOUNT,MEMORY BOARD 2 2 2 14,162A228010 MEMORY PCB 2 2 2 14,16

' 2A228020 IC DIMM 2 2 2 14,16' 2A327010 SENSOR,HUMIDITY 1 1 1 14

2A806030 BUSH FEED 4 4 4 2,122A806250 RING STOPPER 3 4 3 2,8,10,13

' 2A806720 GEAR MPF 1 1 1 42A807050 GEAR CASSETTE 1 1 1 628107301 PRESSING SPRING 2 2 2 7

' 28107400 BEARING,688ZZNR 2 2 2 8' 29806560 BUSHING 6 3 3 3 6,7

29806710 PULLEY,RELEASE LEVER 2 2 2 6' 29806810 BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION 3 3 3 6,7' 29812291 CUSHION,CONTACT GLASS 9 9 9 8

29822230 GEAR 16T,PF IDLE 1 1 1 1329822280 SPRING,PF COUPLER 1 1 1 6

' 3AL05120 LABEL,DF ORIGINAL CAUTION 1 1 1 63AL06090 CUSHION,ORIGINAL GUIDE 2 2 2 6

' 3AL07250 REAR STATIC ELIMINATOR,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 73AL08170 PULLEY,EJECT 2 2 2 63A707020 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 7

' 3A707030 PULLEY,LEADING FEED 1 1 1 63A707060 SHAFT,LEADING FEED 1 1 1 63A707070 SHAFT,SEPARATION 1 1 1 73A707090 HOLDER,SEPARATION PULLEY 2 2 2 73A707110 GEAR 30,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 6

' 3A707120 PULLEY,LEADING FEED 1 1 1 63A722040 PULLEY 24,CONVEYING 2 2 2 7

' 3A722090 PULLEY,DRIVE 2 2 2 5,7' 3BC07130 ONE-WAY CLUTCH 6 1 1 1 6

3BH26030 PIN,OPTION 2 2 2 14' 3BP11070 COVER,ADF 1 1 1 5' 3BP11080 HOUSING,CONVEYING 1 1 1 5' 3BP11090 GUIDE,ORIGINAL 1 1 1 5' 3BP11100 ROLLER,CONVEYING 1 1 1 5' 3BP11110 ROLLER,EJECT 1 1 1 5

3BP11120 MOUNT,DRIVE 1 1 1 5' 3BP11130 GEAR 25/19 1 1 1 5' 3BP11140 SPRING,CONVEYING 4 4 4 5' 3BP11150 MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER 2 2 2 5,6' 3BP11160 UPPER HINGE 2 2 2 5' 3BP11170 LOWER HINGE 2 2 2 5' 3BP11180 ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION 1 1 1 5' 3BP11190 ACTUATOR,TIMING DETECTION 1 1 1 5' 3BP11220 SPRING,ORIGINAL GUIDE 2 2 2 5

3BP11230 WIRE,ADF 1 1 1 5' 3BP11240 FRONT FILM,CONVEYING 1 1 1 5' 3BP11250 REAR FILM,CONVEYING 1 1 1 5

3BP11270 SHAFT,HINGE 2 2 2 5' 3BP11280 PULLEY 22,CONVEYING 2 2 2 5' 3BP11290 GEAR 20,CONVEYING 1 1 1 5

2A1/2A2

– 39 –




Quantity

230V120V 240V

' 3BP11300 SHEET,READING 2 2 2 5,73BP11310 TRAY,EJECT 1 1 1 5

' 3BP11320 MOUNT,PULLEY 1 1 1 53BP11330 RETAINER,TENSION 1 1 1 5

' 3BR02010 BASE,ADF 1 1 1 63BR02020 FRAME,ADF 1 1 1 63BR02030 STAY,ADF 1 1 1 63BR02060 LEVER,RELEASE SWITCH 1 1 1 63BR02080 MOUNT,RELEASE SWITCH 1 1 1 73BR03010 LEFT HINGE 1 1 1 63BR03040 RIGHT HINGE 1 1 1 6

' 3BR04010 LOWER COVER,CONVEYING 1 1 1 6' 3BR04020 HANDLE,ADF 1 1 1 6

3BR05010 LABEL,ORIGINAL UPPER LIMIT 1 1 1 6' 3BR06010 TABLE,ADF 1 1 1 6' 3BR06020 FRONT CURSOR 1 1 1 6' 3BR06030 REAR CURSOR 1 1 1 6' 3BR06040 COVER,TABLE 1 1 1 6' 3BR07010 COVER,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 6' 3BR07020 UPPER ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 7

3BR07030 LOWER ROLLER,REGISTRATION 1 1 1 7' 3BR07040 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 6

3BR07050 GUIDE,LIFT 1 1 1 73BR07060 GUIDE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 7

' 3BR07070 SHAFT,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 63BR07080 SHAFT,LIFT 1 1 1 7

' 3BR07110 ACTUATOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION 1 1 1 63BR07120 LEVER,LIFT 1 1 1 7

' 3BR07130 BELT 114,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 63BR07140 MOUNT,HANDLE 1 1 1 63BR07150 FRONT HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 1 63BR07160 REAR HOOK,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 1 6

' 3BR07170 HANDLE,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 1 63BR07180 SPRING,SEPARATION PULLEY 2 2 2 73BR07190 MOUNT,TIMING SWITCH 1 1 1 7

' 3BR07200 ACTUATOR,TIMING SWITCH 1 1 1 73BR07210 MOUNT,SEPARATION PULLEY 1 1 1 73BR07220 FRONT SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 1 63BR07230 REAR SUPPORT PLATE,PAPER FEED COVER 1 1 1 63BR07240 GROUND PLATE,SEPARATION PULLEY 1 1 1 7

3BR07260 UPPER FILM,CONVEYING 1 1 1 6' 3BR07270 PAD,LIFT 1 1 1 7

3BR07280 FILM,LIFT 1 1 1 73BR07290 SHAFT, 1 1 1 63BR07310 FRONT PLATE SPRING,SEPARATION 1 1 1 73BR07320 FRONT PAD,SEPARATION 1 1 1 73BR07330 FRONT FILM,SEPARATION 1 1 1 73BR07350 FRONT FILM,PAD SEPARATION 1 1 1 73BR07360 SPRING,LIFT 1 1 1 73BR08010 STAY,CONVEYING 1 1 1 73BR08020 GUIDE,CONVEYING 1 1 1 73BR08030 GUIDE,READING 1 1 1 73BR08040 SPRING,READING 2 2 2 73BR08050 FILM A,CONVEYING 3 3 3 73BR08060 FILM B,CONVEYING 2 2 2 7

' 3BR10010 UPPER ROLLER,EJECT 1 1 1 73BR10030 UPPER GUIDE,EJECT 1 1 1 73BR10040 LOWER GUIDE,EJECT 1 1 1 73BR10050 FILM,EJECT 1 1 1 73BR10060 PULLEY,FEED 2 2 2 73BR10070 PLATE SPRING,EJECT PULLEY 1 1 1 73BR10080 SHAFT,EJECT PULLEY 1 1 1 73BR22010 MOUNT,ADF MOTOR 1 1 1 73BR22020 GEAR 42/20,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 73BR22030 CAM,LIFT 1 1 1 7

' 3BR22040 BELT 192,CONVEYING 2 2 2 5,73BR22060 GEAR 38,LIFT 1 1 1 73BR22070 GEAR,DRIVE ADF 1 1 1 7

' 3BR22080 SQUARE SPRING,CAM 1 1 1 73BR22090 TENSION PLATE B,DRIVE 1 1 1 73BR27010 WIRE,ADF 1 1 1 7

' 3BR27020 MOTOR,ADF 1 1 1 7' 33906070 TORQUE LIMITER,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 7

33912150 PULLEY,WIRE 2 2 2 8' 33914190 TONER SENSOR 1 1 1 10' 33915190 TONER MOTOR 1 1 1 13

33927580 CORE 9-20X32 1 1 1 934806140 STOPPER 4 1 1 1 534806150 STOPPER 5 27 34 27 2,6,7,8,

10,13

– 40 –

2A1/2A2




Quantity

230V120V 240V

34806480 STOPPER 6 4 4 4 2' 34906150 INNER BUSHING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 34906160 OUTER BUSHING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 34907021 FRONT CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1 3' 34907031 REAR CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1 3' 34907050 REAR CLAW,CASSETTE 1 1 1 3

34907060 LEVER,CURSOR RETAINING 1 1 1 334907070 PIN,CLAW CASSETTE 4 4 4 3,6

' 34907131 REAR STOPPER,PAPER 1 1 1 334907141 GEAR 18,CASSETTE 1 1 1 334907290 PULLEY,GUIDE 2 2 2 234907330 LABEL,PAPER UPPER LIMIT 1 1 1 3

' 34917170 PULLEY,TRANSFER HOLDER 4 4 4 5' 34918090 GEAR 19,DISPOSAL 1 1 1 11

34922570 GEAR 23,DEVELOPING 1 1 1 1335320300 SPRING,EJECT ACTUATOR 1 1 1 735322020 GEAR 20,PAPER FEED DRIVE 2 2 2 7

' 35322190 GEAR 28,FIXING COUPLER 1 1 1 1335322200 COUPLER,FIXING DRIVE 1 1 1 1335322210 SPRING,FIXING COUPLER 1 1 1 13

' 35327400 SWITCH,FEED 2 2 2 8' 35411070 GEAR 21,IDLE 2 2 2 8

35904270 HOOK,CONVEYING HANDLE 2 2 2 4' 35911790 GEAR 20,PAPER FEED PULLEY 1 1 1 7

35912060 PULLEY,SCANNER DRUM 2 2 2 835912210 SPRING,MIRROR HOLDER 6 6 6 8

' 35927420 SWITCH,SIZE 1 1 1 14' 35968010 FLASH JIG PCB 1 1 1 16

36211500 GEAR,LEADING FEED JOINT 1 1 1 6' 36220210 LEFT THERMOSTAT,FIXING 1 1 1 12

36505111 LABEL,TONER DISPOSAL TANK 1 1 1 16 ' 45592554 BEARING 688ADD 1 1 1 10

48128609 PIN,UPPER FRONT COVER 1 1 1 648129208 PIN,TENSION 1 1 1 5

' 49028113 BUSHING 6-19,DEV.UNIT 1 1 1 1049628105 RECEIVER,MAGNET 2 2 2 1

' 62227070 SOLENOID B,FEED SHIFT 1 1 1 863127120 NOISE FILTER,10A 1 1 1463511220 STOP RING,4 1 1 1 14

' 63527020 SAFETY,SWITCH 1 1 1 7

' 63820190 BEARING, FIXING UNIT 2 2 2 1263822220 GEAR,41 1 1 1 1365011310 GEAR 20,IDLE 1 1 1 765014160 RIGHT GEAR 25,TONER SUPPLY 1 1 1 1265016080 STOP RING E3 9 9 9 5,6,1265027470 CORE,7-15X18 2 2 2 8,1465902670 CUSHION RUBBER 4 4 4 2

' 66006840 BUSHING 4 4 4 4 5' 67322230 BUSHING 8 2 2 2 2' 68720160 PULLEY,FEED SHIFT 2 2 2 2

68721640 PULLEY 20,DUPLEX CONVEYING 1 1 1 668802070 SPRING A,LIFT UP 1 1 1 368820280 HOLDER,BEARING 2 2 2 1271804400 MAGNET,LOWER FRONT COVER 2 2 2 1,13

' 72107160 BUSHING 6,LOWER REGISTRATION ROLLER 2 2 2 773818100 SPRING, BLADE THRUST 2 2 2 1374808080 BEARING,686ZZNR 2 2 2 7

' 75720240 SPRING SEPARATION CLAW 4 4 4 1276508130 SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER 1 1 1 378620710 CLAW STOPPER 3 3 3 6B4303080 TRIPLE SCREW M3X8(BLACK) 1 1 1 8C2804100 POLYESTER SLIDER WASHER 4.1X10X0.5T 5 5 5 6J7330120 PLUG,9715B-12A(IRS) 1 1 1 2L0223130 ROUND TYPE TERMINAL,M4,LRT-51T-4FE 1 1 14

M1203200 OPEN BUSHING,OCB-375 1 1 1 7' M1651000 FUSE,250V 1,25A MINI 239 1 1 1 8' M1655030 FUSE,237005(LITTEL) 1 14' M1661000 FUSE 15A,314015 1 14' M1753010 FUSE,S506-3,15A(BUSSMANN) 1 1 14' M1756010 FUSE,S506-6,3A(BUSSMANN) 1 1 14

M2105010 NYLON CLAMP 3N,NK-3N 1 1 1 6M2105020 NYLON CLAMP 4N,NK-4N 2 2 2 5,8M2105720 MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 1 1 1 7M2107120 BINDING BAND SG-130 1 1 1 7M2607010 BINDING BAND,PLT1M 1 1 1 14

' NAS09010 BACKUP RAM M48Z35Y-70PC 1 1 1 16

– 1 –

FIG.1 CASSETTE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2

FIG.2 DECK UNIT · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4

• INDEX· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6

CONTENTS

3BG

– 2 –

FIG. 1 CASSETTE

REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC) are not necessarywhen using inch-sized paper [8.5" x 14",8.5" x 11" or 5.5" x 8.5"].

*

4

10

19

16

14

14

172

15

12

11

1318

1

5

3

8

6

9*

9*

7

HDC

HAT

WAD

– 3 –

3BG





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 1 CASSETTE

' 1 2A107011 COVER,CASSETTE 1 1 1' 2 2A107020 GROUND PLATE,CASSETTE 1 1 1

3 2A107030 SPRING,CASSETTE 2 2 24 2A107050 FRONT CLAW CASSETTE 1 1 15 76508130 SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER 1 1 16 19507011 CASSETTE,PAPER FEED 1 1 17 19507040 BASE,CASSETTE 1 1 1

' 8 19507050 LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE 1 1 19 19507080 REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC) 2 2 2

10 34907021 FRONT CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 111 34907031 REAR CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 112 34907050 REAR CLAW,CASSETTE 1 1 1

' 13 34907060 LEVER,CURSOR RETAINING 1 1 114 34907070 PIN,CLAW CASSETTE 2 2 2

' 15 34907131 REAR STOPPER,PAPER 1 1 116 34907141 GEAR 18,CASSETTE 1 1 117 34907330 LABEL,PAPER UPPER LIMIT 1 1 118 68802070 SPRING A,LIFT UP 1 1 1

' 19 2A107060 FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE 2 2 2

3BG

– 4 –

FIG. 2 DECK UNIT

HAO

37

1434

8

35

11

25

3534

33

33

17

1815

19

20

45

12

46

43

37 26

42

48

24

47

16

2341

6

6

2

5

3 9

44

1

13 4

442

44

28

2229

29

27

30

39

3039

38

3137

32

21

37

40 3637 37

7

10

HDB

BBB

BBB

BBB

BBB

BBB

HDB

BBK

BBK

BHI

BHI

BBK

BHI

HAO

HAO

HAO

BBB

HAO

HAO

BBB

BBB

BBB

HCB

– 5 –

3BG





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


' 1 3BG02010 BASE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 2 3BG02020 GROUND PLATE,MACHINE 1 1 1

3 3BG02030 STOPPER,CASSETTE GROUND 1 1 14 3BG02040 SLIDER,CASSETTE 2 2 25 3BG02050 COVER,GROUND 1 1 16 3BG02060 PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER 2 2 27 3BG02070 LEFT GROUND PLATE,MACHINE 1 1 1

' 8 3BG04010 COVER,RELEASE 1 1 1' 9 3BG04020 UPPER REAR COVER 1 1 1' 10 3BG04030 REAR COVER,LID 1 1 1' 11 3BG04040 HOOK,RELEASE 1 1 1

12 72114120 GEAR 19,DEVELOPER UNIT 1 1 1' 13 3BG05020 LABEL,CASSETTE SIZE 1 1 1

14 3BG06010 GUIDE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 15 3BG06020 ROLLER,FEED 1 1 1' 16 3BG06030 HOUSING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1

17 3BG06040 ACTUATOR,FEED 1 1 118 3BG06050 COVER,ACTUATOR 1 1 119 3BG06060 SPRING,ACTUATOR 1 1 120 3BG22010 MOUNT,DRIVE 1 1 121 3BG22020 GEAR 25/59 1 1 122 3BG22040 SHAFT,CLUTCH 1 1 123 3BG27010 WIRE,CASSETTE 1 1 1

' 24 3BG27030 MOTOR,CASSETTE 1 1 125 74318270 SPRING,TONER DISPOSAL 1 1 1

' 26 2AV27330 CLUTCH,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 27 2A106010 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2 2 2

28 2A106040 SHAFT,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 29 2A106170 PULLEY B,PAPER FEED 2 2 2

30 2A106191 SUPPORT PLATE,GUIDE PULLEY 2 2 2' 31 29806560 BUSHING 6 1 1 1' 32 29806810 BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION 1 1 1

33 3A504020 COUPLER,RELEASE 2 2 2' 34 3A506070 PULLEY,CONVEYING 2 2 2

35 3A506090 SPRING,PRESSING 2 2 236 34806140 STOPPER 4 1 1 137 34806150 STOPPER 5 6 6 6

' 38 34906150 INNER BUSHING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1' 39 34907290 PULLEY,GUIDE 2 2 2

40 34918090 GEAR 19,DISPOSAL 1 1 1

' 41 35327400 SWITCH,FEED 1 1 1' 42 35927420 SWITCH,SIZE 2 2 2' 43 36093040 PARTS MOTOR DRIVE PCB(SP) 1 1 1' 44 66260030 BASE RUBBER,SORTER 4 4 4' 45 67322230 BUSHING 8 1 1 1

46 M2105720 MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 1 1 147 M2107120 BINDING BAND SG-130 1 1 148 M2104260 EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA) 1 1 1

FIG. 2 DECK UNIT

– 6 –

3BG




Quantity

230V120V 240V

19507011 CASSETTE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 119507040 BASE,CASSETTE 1 1 1 1

' 19507050 LEVER,CASSETTE BASE RELEASE 1 1 1 119507080 REAR STOPPER,PAPER(METRIC) 2 2 2 1

' 2AV27330 CLUTCH,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 2A106010 PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2 2 2 2

2A106040 SHAFT,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 2A106170 PULLEY B,PAPER FEED 2 2 2 2

2A106191 SUPPORT PLATE,GUIDE PULLEY 2 2 2 2' 2A107011 COVER,CASSETTE 1 1 1 1' 2A107020 GROUND PLATE,CASSETTE 1 1 1 1

2A107030 SPRING,CASSETTE 2 2 2 12A107050 FRONT CLAW CASSETTE 1 1 1 1

' 2A107060 FRICTION PLATE,CASSETTE 2 2 2 1' 29806560 BUSHING 6 1 1 1 2' 29806810 BUSHING,6 REGISTRATION 1 1 1 2

3A504020 COUPLER,RELEASE 2 2 2 2' 3A506070 PULLEY,CONVEYING 2 2 2 2

3A506090 SPRING,PRESSING 2 2 2 2' 3BG02010 BASE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 3BG02020 GROUND PLATE,MACHINE 1 1 1 2

3BG02030 STOPPER,CASSETTE GROUND 1 1 1 23BG02040 SLIDER,CASSETTE 2 2 2 23BG02050 COVER,GROUND 1 1 1 23BG02060 PLATE SPRING,CASSETTE HOLDER 2 2 2 23BG02070 LEFT GROUND PLATE,MACHINE 1 1 1 2

' 3BG04010 COVER,RELEASE 1 1 1 2' 3BG04020 UPPER REAR COVER 1 1 1 2' 3BG04030 REAR COVER,LID 1 1 1 2' 3BG04040 HOOK,RELEASE 1 1 1 2' 3BG05020 LABEL,CASSETTE SIZE 1 1 1 2

3BG06010 GUIDE,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2' 3BG06020 ROLLER,FEED 1 1 1 2' 3BG06030 HOUSING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 2

3BG06040 ACTUATOR,FEED 1 1 1 23BG06050 COVER,ACTUATOR 1 1 1 23BG06060 SPRING,ACTUATOR 1 1 1 23BG22010 MOUNT,DRIVE 1 1 1 23BG22020 GEAR 25/59 1 1 1 23BG22040 SHAFT,CLUTCH 1 1 1 2

INDEX

3BG27010 WIRE,CASSETTE 1 1 1 2 ' 3BG27030 MOTOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1 2

34806140 STOPPER 4 1 1 1 234806150 STOPPER 5 6 6 6 2

' 34906150 INNER BUSHING,PAPER FEED 1 1 1 234907021 FRONT CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1 134907031 REAR CURSOR,CASSETTE 1 1 1 134907050 REAR CLAW,CASSETTE 1 1 1 1

' 34907060 LEVER,CURSOR RETAINING 1 1 1 134907070 PIN,CLAW CASSETTE 2 2 2 1

' 34907131 REAR STOPPER,PAPER 1 1 1 134907141 GEAR 18,CASSETTE 1 1 1 1

' 34907290 PULLEY,GUIDE 2 2 2 234907330 LABEL,PAPER UPPER LIMIT 1 1 1 134918090 GEAR 19,DISPOSAL 1 1 1 2

' 35327400 SWITCH,FEED 1 1 1 2' 35927420 SWITCH,SIZE 2 2 2 2' 36093040 PARTS MOTOR DRIVE PCB(SP) 1 1 1 2' 66260030 BASE RUBBER,SORTER 4 4 4 2' 67322230 BUSHING 8 1 1 1 2

68802070 SPRING A,LIFT UP 1 1 1 172114120 GEAR 19,DEVELOPER UNIT 1 1 1 274318270 SPRING,TONER DISPOSAL 1 1 1 276508130 SPRING BELT GUIDE ROLLER 1 1 1 1

M2104260 EDGING,EDS-0607U(KITAGAWA) 1 1 1 2M2105720 MINIATURE CLAMP,UAMS-05-2 1 1 1 2M2107120 BINDING BAND SG-130 1 1 1 2

Printing System (M)

– 1 –

FIG.1 PRINTING SYSTEM · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2

CONTENTS

3BM

– 2 –

FIG. 1 PRINTING SYSTEM

1

2

3

5

6

47

8

– 3 –

3BM





230V120V 240V

QuantityRef.No.


FIG. 1 PRINTING SYSTEM

1 3BM01010 PRINTER CONTROL PCB ASS’Y 1 1 12 •3BM68010 CODE ROM SERVICE PCB 1 1 13 •3BM28010 PRINTER CONTROL PCB 1 1 14 2AV26240 READ LID,SHIELD 1 1 15 3BH26030 PIN,OPTION 1 1 16 3BK26010 MOUNT,PRINTER BOARD 1 1 17 3BK26020 GUIDE,CF 1 1 18 3BK26030 RAIL,OPTION 1 1 1

330/331

CLASSIFICATION OF THE SCREWS IN ILLUSTRATION

REF. ITEM # DESCRIPTIONBBB B1303050 BINDING SCREW BVM3X5 (BLACK)

BBK B1303060 BINDING SCREW BVM3X6 (BLACK)

BEA B1603050 BINDING SCREW M3X5 (BRASS,NI)

BHI B3313080 BINDING TAP-TITE SCREW M3X08

BIA B8024350 BINDING TAP-TIGHT B SCREW M4X35

BIB B3310100 +BINDING TAP-TIGHT P BRONZE SCREW M2.3X10

BMF B1003140 BINDING SCREW CVM3X14

BVV B1324080 BINDING SCREW WITH SW (BLACK) M4X8

CIB B8073080 FLAT HEAD TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08

DJW B5393030 W-POINT SET SCREW M3X3

E03 D1000300 STOP RING (E-3)

E05 D1000500 STOP RING (E-5)

E07 D1000700 STOP RING (E-7)

GEA B9604080 GROUNDING SCREW M4X8 (BRASS,N;)

HAD B4003050 TRIPLE SCREW M3X05

HAO B4043080 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08

HAQ B4043100 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X10

REF. ITEM # DESCRIPTIONHAT B4144080 +TP TAP-TITE P SCREW(CHROMIUM)

HAU B4043080 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08

HBH B4303060 TRIPLE SCREW M3X6 (BLACK)

HBI B4303080 TRIPLE SCREW M3X8(BLACK)

HCB B4103050 TRIPLE SCREW M3X05(CHROMIUM)

HCJ B4104100 TRIPLE SCREW M4X10(CHROMIUM)

HCL B4103060 TRIPLE SCREW M3X06(CHROMIUM)

HDB B4343080 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X08(BLACK)

HDC B4344080 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M4X08(BLACK)

HDG B4343100 TRIPLE TAP-TITE P SCREW M3X10(BLACK)

KAK E0020080 SPRING PIN 2X8

KAL E0020100 SPRING PIN 2X10

KAM E0020120 SPRING PIN 2X12

KKG E0030160 SPRING PIN 3X16

NBA C1303000 NUT M3 (BLACK)

WAD C2005120 PLAIN WASHER PWM5

KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.Headquarters:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008TEL : (973) 808-8444FAX : (973) 882-6000

New York Show Room:149 West 51st street,New York, NY 10019TEL : (212) 554-2679FAX : (212) 554-2625

Northeastern Region:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008TEL : (973) 808-8444FAX : (973) 882-4401

Midwestern Region:201 Hansen Court Suite 119Wood Dale, Illinois 60191TEL : (630) 238-9982FAX : (630) 238-9487

Western Region:14101 Alton Parkway,P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,California 92618-7006TEL : (949) 457-9000FAX : (949) 457-9119

Southeastern Region:1500 Oakbrook Drive,Norcross, Georgia 30093TEL : (770) 729-9786FAX : (770) 729-9873

Southwestern Region:2825 West Story Road,Irving, Texas 75038-5299TEL : (972) 550-8987FAX : (972) 570-4704

Dallas Parts Distribution Center& National Training Center:2825 West Story Road,Irving, Texas 75038-5299TEL : (972) 659-0055FAX : (972) 570-5816

KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.6120 Kestrel Road,Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8TEL : (905) 670-4425FAX : (905) 670-8116

KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.Av. 16 de Septiembre #407Col. Santa Inés,Delegación AzcapotzalcoMéxico, D.F. C.P. 02130TEL : 3-83-27-41FAX : 3-83-78-04

Printed in U.S.A.

© 2000 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation

is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

km-1510, km-1810 parts, service manual

Documents